Home

2007 Maxima Owner`s Manual

Contents

1. Select Ringtone Bluetooth Off Use the Setup command to change options as sociated with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System Pair phone Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone to the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System NOTE The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure the procedure will be cancelled Also see Pairing procedure earlier in this section for additional information Up to 5 phones can be paired If you try to pair a sixth phone the system announces that you must first delete one phone or replace an existing phone If you try to pair a phone that has already been paired to your vehicle s system the system an nounces the name the phone is already using The pairing procedure will then be cancelled When prompted by the system choose from the following commands New phone Refer to Pairing a phone earlier in this section Replace phone The system announces the names of the phones already paired and asks which you would like to replace Once you say the name of the phone you wish to replace the pairing procedure will begin Refer to Pairing procedure earlier in this section List phone See the description below List phone Use the List Phone command to hear the names of the phones currently paired If no phones are pair
2. Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFEC specifi cations where it is available Many of the automo bile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu lated gasolines These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy genates such as ethanol MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de termined If in doubt ask your service station manager If you use oxygenate blend gasoline please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and or fuel system damage The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recom
3. When the memory switch 1 or 2 is not pushed and held for at least 1 second When the seat has been already moved to the memorized position When no seat position is stored in the memory switch When the CVT selector lever is moved from P Park to any other position When the driver s door remains open more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled for vehicles with naviga tion system See Vehicle electronic systems in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 31 MEMO 3 32 Pre driving checks and adjustments 4 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Control panel buttons with monochrome screen 4 2 How to use the TRIP INFO button 4 3 COCK eaten oe eeceuusavereeee sec gu E seas 4 5 How to use the AUDIO button forcontrol panel cesedsac Soucnayunisee Fe0eoees 4 5 DOOr WamMinG s 32222052 eteceerbeneeeuesenensd 4 6 Control panel buttons with navigation system 4 6 How to use the joystick and ENTER button 4 7 How to use the BACK button 00 eee 4 7 Setting up the start up screen cee ee 4 7 How to use the TRIP button 000 4 7 How to use the SETTING button 4 11 oA QUO aecacad tearhadensamdoann d
4. 2 25 Intelligent Key system 2 2 02 eae 3 7 Key operating range 3 8 Key operation 2 0 3 9 Mechanical key 1 2 022 ee aes 3 3 Remote keyless entry operation 3 12 Troubleshooting guide 3 17 Warning signals wv a 0 a6 aaa aw amp 3 17 Interior light 2 o oa s hee we ae we HS 2 42 Interior trunk lid release 3 20 ISOFIX child restraints 1 20 J Jump starting aaa ee o wow ee 6 7 K Keyfob battery replacement 8 24 Keyless entry With Intelligent Key system See Intelligent Key system 3 12 Keys For Intelligent Key system 3 2 L Labels Air conditioner specification label 9 11 C M V S S certification label 9 10 Emission control information label 9 10 Engine serialnumber 9 10 F M V S S certification label 9 10 Vehicle identification number VIN Dialeis ao e we ee ee om oe Be oe 9 9 Warning labels for SRS 1 51 Language setting 4 5 4 15 10 3 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren OVSE e eere Ea Gea Ge ae aoe a3 1 20 License plate Installing the license plate 9 12 Light Air bag warning light 1 52 2 13 Brake light See stop light 8 27 Bulb check instrument panel 2 9 Bulb replacement a aoaaa aaa 8 27 Charge warning light aoaaa aaa 2 10 Gomenng ligh as lt ceas a ew ww aa
5. ssssseserrrarrnurrrrrrrrnnnnno 9 9 Vehicle identification 0 c cece eee ees 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Vehicle identification number chassis nUMDE cucnucdsecsasecas watvedangucas 9 9 Engine serial number 2 02 005 9 10 F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 10 Emission control information label 9 10 Tire and loading information label 9 11 Air conditioner specification label 9 11 Installing front license plate 9 12 Vehicle loading information 005 9 12 Tots AE PA A Gocet ee we T E 9 12 Vehicle load capacity sssssannnererrrannnn 9 13 Loading iPS 4 2 20508 vernon setetuncceseweemees 9 15 Measurement of weights 2 5 9 15 TOWING a Wallet sss 2a ceneetpeneseceeas ees ceneeus 9 16 Maximum load IMG lt 222cnca2cersrewenteedeuns 9 16 Towing load specification 00e00e 9 19 TOWING safety c2 c22cndececedhee se eacciedacscees 9 19 Plat tOWNG ace sarees ce tte eee T E TE 9 23 Uniform tire quality grading 20 5 9 24 Emission control system warranty 9 25 Reporting safety defects US only 9 25 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test 9 25 Event data recorders ssssaasussrrrarnnnnn n 9 26 Owner s Manual Service Manual order information 9 27 In the event
6. 1 Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored This can be confirmed by using the List Names command See Phone book earlier in this section phone book 2 Replace one of the names being confused with a new name The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the 4 56 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Exhaust gas carbon monoxide 005 5 2 Three way Catalyst 2dcoaciveenc exer ee eaerneeans 5 2 Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS 5 3 Avoiding collision and rollover 5 5 5 Drinking alcohol drugs and driving 5 5 lgniton SWIC eeri kaasne ra oa Ea e 5 6 Intelligent Key System 00 eee ee eee 5 6 Ignition switch POSWIONS s 2204 2220ud eeleeeyeneeten 5 7 Nissan vehicle immobilizer system 5 7 Before starting the engine 2 022005 5 8 Starting the engine 2 isseckecsaseaweacaveeweeedn 5 8 Driving the Venlo vacdetes ounce sed seu soe ecwtesen 5 9 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 5 9 Parking Drak augavancoee eactees peewee DaN NEE 5 13 EE COMO ETTE E sncitees 5 14 Precautions on cruise control 5 14 Cruise control operations n sessar cee eee 5 14 Break in schedule sacccntenesniteceeideeens Hebeden 5 15 Increasing
7. Brake fluid levels Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir 8 4 Maintenance and do it yourself Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold Engine drive belts Make sure the drive belts are not frayed worn cracked or oily Engine oil level Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports cracks or holes If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer See the carbon monoxide warning in the Starting and driving section of this manual Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel oil water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident check for the cause and have it corrected imme diately Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold with the engine off Check the lines for proper attachment leaks cracks etc Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt insects leaves etc that may have accumulated Make sure the hoses have no cracks deformation rot or loose connections
8. e Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in jured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys EXHAUST GAS carbon monoxide A WARNING e Do not breathe exhaust gases they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide is danger ous It can cause unconsciousness or death 5 2 Starting and driving If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle drive with all win dows fully open and have the vehicle inspected immediately Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time Keep the trunk lid closed while driving otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compart ment If you must drive with the trunk lid open follow these precautions 1 Open all the windows 2 Set the air recirculation but ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air If electrical wiring or other cable con nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body follow the manufacturer s recommen dation to prevent carbon monoxide en try into the vehicle The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever a
9. CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard F M V S S C M V S S certification la bel is affixed as shown This label contains valu able vehicle information such as Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR month and year of manufacture Vehicle Identification Number VIN etc Review it carefully The number is stamped on the engine as shown 9 10 Technical and consumer information WTI0173 EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emission control information label is at tached to the underside of the hood as shown WT10167 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and The air conditioner specification label is affixed to Loading Information label The label is locatedas_ the underside of the hood as shown shown Technical and consumer information 9 11 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE Flat blade screwdriver Screw grommet _ ABT 1 P Screw2 P 9 12 Technical and consumer information Use the following steps to mount the front license plate Before mounting the license plate confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the plastic bag License plate bracket License plate bracket screws x 2 License plate screws x 2 Screw grommets x 2 Make a shallow hole in the bumper fascia at the location marks small dimples using a 0 39 in 10 mm dr
10. CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat ing A WARNING To avoid the danger of being scalded never change the coolant when the en gine is hot Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep coolant out of the reach of chil dren and pets Engine coolant must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations 8 8 Maintenance and do it yourself ENGINE OIL CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL i Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature Turn off the engine Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean Re insert it all the way A PS9 5 Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level It should be between the H High and L Low marks This is the normal oper ating oil level range If the oil level is below the L Low mark remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening Do not overfill 6
11. Fade Balance Speed Sense Volume if so equipped Beep ON OFF Language Audio or OFF Bass To adjust Bass Treble Fade and Balance press the AUDIO button until the desired mode appears in the display Press the TUNE button to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the TUNE button to adjust Fader and Balance modes Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers To change the SSV mode to OFF LEVEL1 to LEVEL5 press the TUNE button left or right To change the Beep to ON or OFF press the TUNE button left or right This will enable or disable the beep sound heard during menu se lection To change the Language to English or Frangais press the TUNE button left or right Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO button re peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears Otherwise the radio or CD display will automati cally reappear after about 5 seconds CLOCK DISP display button Pressing the CLOCK DISP display button will show text information about CD or MP3 and SAT satellite if so equipped in the audio display CD display mode To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text press the CLOCK DISP button The CLOCK DISP button will allow you to scroll 4 30 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems throug
12. Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An in flating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat NISSAN recommends that the child re straint be installed in the rear seat Ac cording to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat If you must install a front facing child re straint in the front seat see Child re straint installation using the seat belts later in this section Improper use or improper installation of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious injury or death in an accident Follow all of the child restraint manu facturer s instructions for installation and use When purchasing a child re straint be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle If the child restraint is not anchored properly the risk of a child being in jured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases Child restraint anchor points are de signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re straints Under no circumstances are
13. You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice during a call Do not place the cellular phone in an area sur rounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degrada tion and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones If the hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning please refer to Troubleshooting guide later in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for troubleshoot ing help Refer to the cellular phone Owner s Manual re garding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device m
14. or Bright map background The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button Push DAY NIGHT button for 2 seconds to resume display Display off Select the Display Off key The indicator of the Display Off turns amber and the message above will be displayed briefly When the audio HVAC Heater and air conditioner or any mode button on the control panel is operated the dis play turns on for that operation If one of the control panel buttons is pressed the display will not automatically turn off until that operation is finished Otherwise the screen turns off auto matically after 5 seconds 4 12 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems To turn the screen on Press the SETTING button and select the Display key and then select the Display Off key Then set the screen to on by press ing the ENTER button or Hold the 2 button for approximately 2 seconds and the message resuming dis play will appear and the Display Off key will be automatically turned on no amber indicator DISPLAY SETTINGS Brightness Contrast Map Background Display Off Lower Display Setting Audio HVAC Lower display setting You can choose to display the audio or HVAC Heater and air conditioner functions on the lower part of the display Select the Lower Dis play Sett
15. wise from the straight up position To lock the steering wheel turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To unlock the steering wheel push the ignition switch in and turn it gently while rotating the steer ing wheel slightly right and left If the battery of the vehicle equipped with the Intelligent Key system is discharged the ignition switch cannot be turned from the LOCK position even using the me chanical key IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS Push in the ignition switch to the position when you turn it LOCK Normal parking position The ignition switch can only be locked in the LOCK position The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed in and turned to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key ACC Accessories This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running ON Normal operating position This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories START This position starts the engine As soon as the engine has started release the knob immediately It will automatically return to the ON position The ignition switch cannot be turned back to the LOCK position unless the selector lever is in the P Park position It can be turned only to the position A CAUTION Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended pe ri
16. 3 760 x 3 205 95 5 x 81 4 Displacement cu in cm 213 45 3 498 Firing order 1 2 3 4 5 6 Idle speed CVT H N iti in position No adjustment is necessary Ignition timing degree B T D C at idle speed CO at idle Spark plug DILFR5A11 Spark plug gap Nominal in mm 0 043 1 1 Camshaft operation Timing chain The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Technical and consumer information 9 7 WHEELS AND TIRES Wheels Tires Spare tire Temporary Full size Speed rating 17 18 R or D depending on tire manufacturer 17 x 7JJ 18 x 7 5JJ P225 55R17 95V P245 45R18 96V T145 80 1 7 17 or 18 H V 9 8 Technical and consumer information DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Overall length Overall width Overall height Front Track 17 inch tire 18 inch tire Rear Track 17 inch tire 18 inch tire Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg 194 4 4 937 71 7 1 821 58 3 1 480 61 4 1 560 61 0 1 549 61 6 1 565 61 2 1 554 111 2 2 824 See the F M V S S C M V S S certification label on the center pillar be tween the driver s side front and rear doors WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planni
17. AM and SAT satellite if so equipped radio to the A B and C preset button in any combination of FM AM or SAT stations 1 Choose preset bank A B or C using the PRESET A B C select button 2 Select the desired FM AM or SAT station band 3 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard 4 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 5 Other buttons can be set in the same manner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band not AM band Cur rently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove Music or programming type such as Clas sical Country or Rock Artist and song information If the station broadcasts RDS information the RDS icon is displayed Compact disc CD player operation Type A Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the 4 32 Display screen heater air co
18. Al LRSO671 Front facing step 4 4 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point See Top tether strap child restraint in this section WRS0697 Front facing step 6 6 Before placing the child in the child restraint hold the child restraint near the LATCH at tachment and use force to push the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place It should not move more than 1 in 25 mm If it does move more than 1 in 25 mm pull again on the anchor attachments to further tighten the child restraint If you are unable to properly secure the restraint move the re straint to another seating position and try again or try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 1 24 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions LRS0665 Rear facing web mounted step 2 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the
19. Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off This will discharge the battery See Automatic drive positioner if so equipped in Pre driving checks and adjustments for auto matic drive positioner operation Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de sired angle is obtained To bring the seatback forward again move the switch forward and move your body forward The seatback will move forward 1 4 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be re clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve hicle is stopped LRS0239 Seat lifter driver s seat Manual Push the front or rear end of the switch up or Lumbar support driver s seat down to adjust the angle and height of the seat The lumbar support feature provides lower back cushion support to the driver Move the lever up or down manual or move the switch forward or backward power to adjust the seat lumbar area Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 5 FOLDING REAR SEAT if so equipped Interior t
20. Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys LPDO185 Driver s side TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH The trunk lid release switch is located below the armrest of the driver s door trim panel To open the trunk lid pull the trunk lid release switch To close the trunk lid lower and push the trunk lid down securely You can open the trunk lid with Intelligent Key Refer to Intelligent Key system earlier in this section sal Y PE Cancel switch When the cancel switch located inside the glove box is OFF the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release switch or with the Intelligent Key LPD0201 SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE 4 seat model only To open the trunk lid from the rear seat fold down the trunk compartment access lid and pull the rear seat trunk release handle 1 To close push the trunk lid down securely Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 19 INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE A WARNING Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become lock
21. P 3 6 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 13 Glove box P 2 34 Automatic anti glare inside mirror P 3 25 Sun visors P 3 24 Interior lights illuminated entry P 2 42 Front seat P 1 2 Sunroof if so equipped P 2 39 Rear console P 2 35 Rear seat P 1 6 Rear cup holders P 2 32 Front console P 2 34 Front cup holders P 2 32 Park brake parking on hills P 5 13 P 5 17 HomeLink P 2 44 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 5 INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 Display screen Navigation system P 4 2 P 4 6 10 Display screen Navigation system con trols P 4 2 P 4 6 11 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 37 12 Glove box P 2 34 13 Audio system controls P 4 22 14 Climate controls P 4 19 15 Storage P 2 31 16 Power outlet P 2 30 17 Shift selector lever P 5 9 18 Hazard warning flasher switch P 2 26 19 Passenger air bag status light P 1 46 20 Ignition switch P 5 6 21 Tilt telescopic steering wheel controls P 3 22 22 Traction control system TCS off switch fi if so equipped P 2 28 or Vehicle dy j namic control VDC off switch if so 20 19 18 17 16 equipped P 2 29 23 Rear sonar system off switch if so equipped P 2 29 1 Side and center ventilators P 4 18 4 Meters and ga
22. Power windows saaa aaa 2 37 Rear power windows 2 38 Precautions Maintenance precautions 8 5 Precautions on child restraints 0 1 18 1 26 1 33 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 10 Precautions on supplemental restraint SySteM aoaaa a 1 37 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Programmable features 4 5 4 11 Push Starting a s nee ae ea oe at a 6 9 R Radio Car phone or CBradio 4 43 Compact Disc CD changer 4 33 4 39 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD CWaANGehs aea a a e ma a A 4 29 4 36 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD DIQVel goes B54 Gee Pa wae BEY 4 29 Steering wheel audio control switch 4 42 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test Gee hehehe ee eee eae ee ewe 9 25 Rear power windows 2 38 Real Sedl 62 6 2 oad oe Oe ua Dawe be eo 1 6 Rear sonar system 5 22 Rear sonar system off switch 2 29 Rearsunshade 44 2 41 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SO e a g a sa oe aS OS RR a on GE 2 20 Recorders Event dalas 4 6445 4 84h Be Ged 9 26 Refrigerant recommendation 9 6 Registering your vehicle in another country 9 9 Reporting safety defects US only 9 25 Resetting average speed 4 4 Resetting the fuel economy 4 4 4 8 Resetting trip 1 andtrip2 4 8 Resetting trip time 2 4 4 4 S Safety
23. Recheck oil level with the dipstick It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break in period depending on the severity of operating conditions CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly Op erating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by warranty CHANGING ENGINE OIL 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature then turn it off Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise Place a large drain pan under the drain plug Remove the drain plug B with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oll If the oil filter is to be changed remove and replace it at this time See Changing engine oil filter later in this section AWARNING Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep used engine oil out of reach of children A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot Waste oil must be disposed of prop erly Check your local regulations Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench Do not
24. The vehicle is raised for service b You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment c You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system d You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system un derbody or rear of the vehicle THREE WAY CATALYST The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system Exhaust gases in the three way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants A WARNING The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys tem are very hot Keep people animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire CAUTION e Do not use leaded gasoline Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re duce the three way catalyst s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants Keep your engine tuned up Malfunc tions in the ignition fuel injection or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst causing it to overheat Do not keep driv ing if the engine misfires or if notice able loss of performance or other un usual operating conditions are detected Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the three w
25. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction If the computer senses a malfunc tion it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self test or while driving have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 3 6 MPH 5 10 km h Starting and driving 5 19 When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up the actuator rapidly ap plies and releases hydraulic pressure This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is oper ating This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly However the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving 5 20 Starting and driving TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM TCS if so equipped When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire may spin or slip With the vehicle traction control system TCS sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability while accelerating When the traction control system is operat ing the slip indicator in the instrument panel blinks lf the slip indicator blinks the
26. This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is conve nient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E Empty There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E Empty Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly After the ignition switch is turned ON this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres sure the warning light will illuminate If you select the tire pressure information if so equipped in the display the LOW PRESSURE warning mes sage will be displayed The tire pressure for each tire will also be displayed When the low tire pressure warning light illumi nates you should stop and adjust the tire pres sure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted After the tire is inflated to the recom mended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the Instruments and controls 2 11 TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
27. Underbody The underbody is frequently ex posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody otherwise rust may form on the floor pan frame fuel lines and exhaust system At the end of winter the underbody should be thor oughly flushed with plain water in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated See the Appearance and care section of this manual Windshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle The following are general precau tions which should be closely observed A WARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface ap ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving Move the shift selector lever to P Park Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs e Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component har nesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position Your vehicle is equipped with an auto matic engine cooling fan It may com
28. brake Move the shift selector lever to P Park 4 Turn off the engine 5 Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person nel that you need assistance 6 Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place away from traffic and clear of the vehicle A WARNING Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the CVT is shifted into P Park Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope ice or slippery areas This is hazardous Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle Wait for profes sional road assistance Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks 1 at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire 2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up A WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury Getting the spare tire and tools Open the trunk Lift the trunk floor carpeting and spare tire cover Remove the jack and wheel nut wrench 2 from the tool box Remove the spare tire In case of emergency 6 3 Jack up point and placing jack LCE0076 Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire A WARNING Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack If it is nec essary to work under the vehicle sup port it with safety stands e Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the veh
29. ignition switch is in the LOCK position with the key removed from the ignition switch This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im mobilizer System is operational If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal functioning the light will remain on while the ignition key is in the ON position If the light still remains on and or the en gine will not start see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser vice as soon as possible Please bring all keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed Q Intermittent intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward A Slower or 8 Faster Also the intermit tent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed For example when the vehicle speed is high the intermittent operation speed will be faster Instruments and controls 2 19 NOTE You can turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func tion for vehicles with navigation system Refer to Vehicle electronic systems in the Display screen heater air conditioner au dio and phone systems section later in this manual 2 Low continuous low speed operation 3 High continuous high speed oper
30. ing mode when the seat belt is fully re tracted Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 31 7 Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor If you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor the retractor is in the automatic locking mode 8 Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 6 After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted the automatic locking mode child restraint mode is canceled WRS0684 Rear facing step 5 Rear facing step 6 5 Remove any additional slack from the child 6 Before placing the child in the child restraint restraint press downward and rearward hold the child restraint near the seat belt firmly in the center of the child restraint to path and use force to push the child restraint compress the vehicle seat cushion and seat from side to side and tug it forward to make back while pulling up on the seat belt sure that it is securely held in place It should not move more than 1 in 25 mm If it does move more than 1 in 25 mm pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint If you are unable to properly secure the restraint move the restraint to another rear seating position and try again or try a different child restraint Not all child re strain
31. perchlorate BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Xanavi Informatics Corporation Bluetooth 2007 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA INC All rights reserved No part of this Owner s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Nissan North America Inc NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs However if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions please contact the NISSAN Con sumer Affairs Department using our toll free number For U S customers 1 800 NISSAN 1 1 800 647 7261 For Canadian customers 1 800 387 0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information Your name address and telephone number Vehicle identification number attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver s side Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealer s name Your comments or questions OR You can write
32. restraint system air bag system and or the pre tensioner seat belts may not function properly For additional details see Supplemental restraint sys tem in the Safety Seats seat belts and supple mental restraint system section of this manual AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the supplemental front air bag supplemental side air bag curtain side impact air bag systems if so equipped and or pre tensioner seat belt systems will not operate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible J Trunk lid open warning light This light comes on when the trunk lid is not securely closed while the ignition key is in the ON position INDICATOR LIGHTS Continuously Variable Transmission CVT indicator light When the ignition switch is turned ON the light comes on for 2 seconds When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi tion this indicator light shows the CVT selector lever position See Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving section of this manual CRUISE Cruise main switch indicator light The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on the cruise control system is operational Continuously Variable Transmission CVT position
33. steering angle air bag readiness air bag perfor mance and seat belt use by the driver or passenger may be recorded These types of systems are sometimes called Event Data Recorders Special equipment can be used to access the electronic data that may be stored in the vehicle s computers sounds are not recorded NISSAN and NISSAN dealers have equipment to access some of this data others may also have this equipment The data may be retrieved during routine vehicle servicing or for special research It might also be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee in response to a request by law enforcement or as other wise required or permitted by law OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle Filled with wiring diagrams illustrations and step by step diagnostic and adjustment pro cedures this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships Also available are genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals and genuine NISSAN Service and Owner s Manuals for older NISSAN models For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact Tweddle Litho Company 1 800 450 9491 www nissan techinfo com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior
34. the DOOR position The light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by performing one of the following op erations Turning the ignition switch to the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the remote controller Switching the room light switch to the OFF position Opening windows The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation simulta neously To open the windows press the but ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec onds after all doors are unlocked The door windows will open while pressing the button on the keyfob The door windows cannot be closed by using the keyfob 3 14 Pre driving checks and adjustments Releasing the trunk lid Push the button for longer than 0 5 sec ond to open the trunk lid The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the trunk cancel switch is in the OFF position See Cancel switch in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section WPD0361 Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pushing and holding the 1 button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0 5 second The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds The panic alarm stops when jit has run for 25 seconds or any button is pushed on the Intelligent Key Silencing the horn beep featur
35. 10 Battery charge warning light 2 10 Brake warning light 2 10 Door open warning light 2 10 Engine oil pressure warning light 2 11 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 26 Low fuel warning light 2 11 Low tire pressure warning light 2 11 Low washer fluid warning light 2 12 Passenger air bag and status light 1 46 Seat belt warning light 2 13 Vehicle security system 2 16 Warning labels for SRS 1 51 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 2 eee eee ee es 2 9 Waning MORS sai oom 168 0 so 2 So ee eS 2 9 Washer switch Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 19 Weights See dimensions and weights 9 8 Wheels andtires 04 8 32 Wheel tire size 1 2 ee ee 9 8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another COUNUYs s sa es wa oe ee ee a 9 9 Window washer fluid 8 12 Windows Locking passengers windows 2 38 Power rear windows 2 38 Power windows 2 4 2 37 Rear power wiNdOWS 2 38 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 19 Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 19 Wiper blades 2 8 19 10 7 MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded pre mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI Anti K
36. 13 Air cleaner housing filter 8 16 Air conditioner Air conditioner service 4 22 Air conditioner specification label 9 11 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations 9 6 Servicing airconditioner 4 292 Alarm system See vehicle security system 2 16 Anchor point locations 1 22 Antenna saaa wea ee bw eee we ow 4 42 Anti lock brake warning light 2 10 Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 19 ArmrestSs 0 aa ee ee 127 Audible reminders 4 2 16 Audio system aoaaa eae 4 22 Compact Disc CD changer 4 33 4 39 Compact disc CD player 4 32 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD Changer 6 640 4 a koe ee we y i 4 29 4 36 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player 4 aces Geek eee wee He 4 29 RO 4 a he8 Faber eS oe oe 2 4 22 Steering wheel audio control switch 4 42 Autolight switch os c sew 6 b eS d a ole A 2 22 Automatic Automatic drive positioner 3 28 Automatic power window switch 2 38 Transmission selector lever lock releases 2 64 59 ae ae eo eee ee 5 12 AUX jack aoaaa 4 33 4 41 Average speed naaa 000 eee 4 4 B Back Dutton as a saasa animara 4 7 Bales sae aaa a a ee a a aA 8 13 Charge warning light 2 10 Before starting the engine 5 8 Belt See drive belt 8 14 Block heater ENGINE e a s bi e 2 oo ek Bee Be ee 5
37. 16 Troubleshooting guide 220223 cceckesedeewsedense 3 17 FOG pesccseee wks E E A E 3 18 arna e E E E E E E E T ETT 3 18 Trunk lid release switch 000 c cece eee eee 3 19 Secondary trunk lid release 4 seat model only c00ccee esse eneees 3 19 Interior trunk lid release 0 cece eee 3 20 Fue ler GOOF snusscccete Ged e erae e AnA 3 20 Opener operation n sessa cece eee 3 20 Fuekiiller cap 2cceenteverceeceecausteertarecs 3 21 Tilting telescopic steering column 00 3 22 Automatic operation if so equipped 3 22 Manual ODCALON ics edt ds Sevredewetseiwsere se 3 23 UN VISOS e secneter canbe dat RANAN LERNE BRS 3 24 Vanity MINO bree reno eet ee cede ee ees epee 3 24 EAE EE ee ceca eee eet A TEES E este 3 25 Automatic anti glare rearview mirror 3 25 Outside MiIOrS acto ecaew sede sdsadewee aacees 3 26 Automatic drive positioner if so equipped 3 28 Memory storage function 000 eee eee 3 28 Entry exit MUNCHON 2 0a vaecucdten one toaeek eam cen 3 30 System ODEON oncsencexceeeekeeceesrstudeaws 3 30 KEYS 1 TD 1 Two Intelligent Keys 2 Mechanical keys with built in transpon der chip inside Intelligent Keys 3 Key number plate INTELLIGENT KEYS Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle s Intel ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve hicle Immobilizer System compo
38. 2 26 Fog ight SWHCWs s s saci ame iredi 2 25 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 21 Headlight control switch 2 22 Headlights wht ee oh Hae oS Be 8 25 IMtSHORTIGIN e lt we ta 2 we bw ow ew 2 42 Light bulbs ss asos sa ia w ee 8 25 Low tire pressure warning light 2 11 Low washer fluid warning light 2 12 Passenger air bag and status light 1 46 Personal lights 64 we we es 2 43 TUNK NOM e s on ee Bk oe Sw eee 2 44 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 48456 eee Gee hE ESS 2 9 Lock Child safety rear door lock 3 6 DOOrlocks 654 46 2 aaa Ob ew oaks 3 4 Fuel filler door lock opener lever 3 20 Glove box lock 2 34 Power door lockS 4 4 04 baw ow a 3 5 Trunk lid lock opener lever 3 19 Low fuel warning light 2 11 Low tire pressure warning light 2 11 Low washer fluid warning light 2 12 Luggage See vehicle loading information 9 12 10 4 M Maintenance Changing the maintenance interval 4 9 Displaying the maintenance notice reminder ae aa eee wes wk Sede a 4 10 General maintenance 8 2 Inside the vehicle 8 3 Maintenance precautions 8 5 Outside the vehicle 8 2 Resetting the maintenance interval 4 9 Seat belt maintenance 1 17 DENNO ae amp ewei Oe Sao eB wt 4 9 Under the hood and vehicle 8 4 Malfunc
39. 3 gallons 11 4 liters of fuel in the fuel tank SERVIC After a few driving trips the ENGINE light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys tem inspection maintenance test See Readi ness for inspection maintenance I M test in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual Operation The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways Malfunction indicator light on steady An emission control system and or CVT mal function has been detected Check the fuel filler cap If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and con tinue to drive the vehicle The xeme light should turn off after a few driving trips If the ewe light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer Malfunction indicator light blinking An en gine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system To re duce or avoid emission control system dam age do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH 72 km h avoid hard acceleration or deceleration avoid steep uphill grades if possible reduce the amount of
40. 4 15 Enter button 4 a ecules ee ede el amp Soe 4 6 Event datarecorders 9 26 Exhaust gas Carbon monoxide 5 2 Eyeglass case 22 2000 2 32 F Flashers See hazard warning flasher switch 2 26 Fat s oy a he a ee ee oe ee ee ee 6 2 Floor mat positioning aid 7 5 Fluid Brake fluid 20004 8 11 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants i are ok OE doe HB a 9 2 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT TCG a aos a dd eee See eee ee 8 11 Engine coolant x cm a we i oom Bod 8 7 Engine Oils ra lt u peed eae eee 8 8 Power steering fluid 8 11 Window washer fluid 8 12 F M V S S certification label 9 10 Fog light SWitCh 6 05 6 a0 8 amp oe eae we wd 2 25 Folding r6arS at 2 2606 ae ee eae oa 1 6 Front air bag system See supplemental restraint system 1 44 Front seals e ecco pyas oe ate eriei 1 2 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 4 6 ss eee aaa 9 2 Fueleconomy 2 eee eee 5 16 Fuel gauge 2 aia st oe eee Bad 2 5 Fuel octane rating o 4 0 48 Sauce wow 4 9 4 Fuel recommendation 9 3 Fuel fillerdoorandcap 3 20 Fuel filler door lock opener lever 3 20 Fuel economy setting 4 4 4 8 Fuses sho aoe ao ewe Ee ee ae e 8 21 Fusible links 2 2 0 2 000008 8 22 G Garage door opener HomeLink Universal Transceiver aoaaa es 2 44 GaS Cabs ea
41. 5 22 Spark plug replacement 8 15 Speedometer 00002 eee 2 3 SRS warning label 1 51 Starting Before starting the engine 5 8 Jump starting n 0 oe kak Ck 6 7 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Push Slani lt i t ix wis bw go Gs oe ER 6 9 Starting the engine 5 8 Startup screen 2 ee ee 4 7 Steering Heated steering wheel 2 28 Power steering fluid 8 11 Power steering system 5 18 Steering wheel audio control switch 4 42 SOPAT 2 neh aaa a e e a a a Ke 8 27 OE e aa E a a ose ee a we 2 31 DUM VISOS a asa aa a 6 a te oe Hose A 3 24 Sunglasses case o oo 2 32 Sunglasses holder naoa aa 2 32 SUNTOOF sa sa oi a e Aa a ES 2 39 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 52 2 13 Supplemental front impact air bag system 1 44 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels 1 51 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSICM e s aca ra daram ee eee a 1 37 Supplemental restraint system Supplemental air bag system 1 37 Switch Autolight switch iy ae ecu es ew Sm 2 2 22 Automatic power window switch 2 38 Fog light switch 2 25 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 26 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 21 Headlight control switch 2 22 Ignition switch aoaaa 5 6 Power door lock switch 3 5 Rear sonar syste
42. B C button 1 No satellite radio reception is available ES a and NO SAT is displayed when the POWER 5 MIX 4 ART SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are J e DISP rr installed and an XM or SIRIUS satel lite radio service subscription is active Satellite radio not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam 2 3 124 ka SEEK P A j a lt TUNE gt 6 CHANNEL SCAN AUX ne CATEGORY a L A 11 10 9 7 LHA0678 1 X pause mute button 6 TUNE CATEGORY button 2 CD insert slot 7 AUDIO button Bass Mid Treble 3 amp CD eject button Fade Balance SSV if so equipped 4 MIX RPT button Beep and Language 5 CLOCK DISP button 8 AUX jack 4 28 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 9 POWER VOLUME control knob 10 SCAN button 11 Station and CD select 1 6 buttons 12 SEEK CH FILE button oS ats 13 RADIO button 1 14 CD AUX button Ae 15 PRESET A B C button No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the TT RADIO button is pressed unless op POWER 5 ies ell 4 tional satellite receiver and antenna are A B C PRESET 1 po E installed and an XM or SIRIUS satel DISP rr S lite radio service subscription is active Satellite radio not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam FM AM SAT RADIO WITH fa lt TUNE gt 16 o ero COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER
43. CAUTION Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E 85 fuel can damage fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty e E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline U S government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi fied by a small square orange and black label with the common abbrevia tion or the appropriate percentage for that region API certification mark ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants earlier in this section NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API certification or Interna tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval API service symbol Committee ILSAC certification and SAE vis cosity standard These oils have the API certifica tion mark on the front of the container Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives The use of an oil additive is not neces sary when the proper
44. Child safety rear door lock 3 6 Child seat belts 1 18 1 26 1 33 Reporting safety defects US only 9 25 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment t 2 Front power seat adjustment 1 4 Seat belt Child safety 2004 1 12 Infants and small children 1 13 Injured Person anaana aa aaa 1 14 Larger children 1 13 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 10 Pregnantwomen 1 14 Seat belt extenders 1 17 Seat belt maintenance noana 1 17 Seat belts 2464 oa tee awe eo 1 10 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 16 Three point type with retractor 1 14 Seat belt warning light 2713 Seatback pockets 00 2 31 Seats Adjustment 4 56 04 6d oa 2 bm does 1 2 Automatic drive positioner 3 28 PON SGAS 25 acm eid 6 ae BES 1 2 Heated seats aoaaa aaa 2 27 Manual front seat adjustment 1 2 Rearseat 0 00002 ee 1 6 Security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 18 3 3 5 7 Self adjusting brakes 0 4 8 20 Service manual order form 9 27 Servicing airconditioner 4 22 Setting button 0 4 4 5 4 11 Shift lock release 0 000048 5 12 Shifting Continuously Variable Transmission OVI 2 eeeteece decussate eu 5 10 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 16 Sonar Rearsystem 225000
45. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life QUICK REFERENCE e wo YS oe N m 2 Engine coolant 8 7 Window washer fluid 8 12 Engine oil 8 8 Passenger supplemental front impact air bag 1 37 Audio system 4 22 Air conditioner 4 19 Supplemental side impact air bag 1 37 Front seats 1 2 Spare tire 6 2 Fuel filler door release 3 20 Fuel recom mendation 9 3 Keys 3 2 Seat belts 1 10 Trunk release 3 18 Supplemental curtain side impact air bag 1 37 Driver supplemental front impact air bag 1 37 Hood release 3 18 Meters and gauges 2 3
46. P Park position R Reverse A CAUTION Use this position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use this position to back up Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from P Park N Neutral or any drive position to R Reverse N Neutral Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to N Neutral and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving Manual shift mode When the selector lever is shifted from D to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while driving the transmission enters the manual shift mode Shift ranges can be selected manu ally In the manual shift mode the shift range is dis played on the position indicator in the meter Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows M1 gt M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M6 6th Use this position for all normal forward driving M5 5th Use this position when driving up long slopes or for engine braking when driving down long slopes M4 4th M3 3rd and M2 2nd Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades M1 1st Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow sand or mud or for maximum engine braking on steep down
47. Press and hold the 44 or gt P button for more than 1 5 seconds while an MP3 CD is playing the MP3 CD plays at an increased speed while rewinding or fast forwarding through the current track being played When the button is released the MP3 CD returns to normal play speed id Gi SEEK TRACK button When the button is pressed for less than 1 5 seconds while a compact disc is playing the track being played returns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the gt I button is pressed for less than 1 5 seconds while the compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played CD select buttons To play another CD that has been loaded press a CD select button 1 6 SCAN RPT When the SCAN RPT play button is pushed while the compact disc is played the play pattern can be changed as follows ALL DISC RPT 1 DISC RPT 1 TRACK RPT ALL DISC RDM 1 DISC RDM ALL DISC RPT ALL DISC RPT All discs loaded will be repeated 1 DISC RPT The disc that is currently playing will be repeated 1 TRACK RPT The track that is currently playing will be repeated ALL DISC RDM Tracks f
48. Type A CD CHANGER Type B 2 3 at la SEEK P A S SCAN AUX 8 11 10 9 7 For all operation precautions see Audio opera LHA0679 tion precautions earlier in this section No satellite radio reception is available and NO 1 CD LOAD button 6 TUNE CAT FOLDER button SAT is displayed when the RADIO button is 2 CD insert slot 7 AUDIO button Bass Mid Treble pressed unless optional satellite receiver and 3 amp CD eject button Fade Balance SSV if so equipped antenna are installed and an XM or SIRIUS 4 MIX RPT button Beep and Language satellite radio service subscription is active Sat l ellite radio not available in Alaska Hawaii and 5 CLOCK DISP button 8 AUX jack Guam Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 29 Audio main operation POWER VOLUME control Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and then press the PWR VOL control knob while the sys tem is off to call up the mode radio or CD which was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the PWR VOL con trol knob Turn the PWR VOL control knob to adjust the volume This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen sitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes AUDIO button Bass Mid Treble Fade Balance SSV Beep and Press the Language AUDIO button to change the mode as follows Bass Mid Treble
49. Use tire chains only on the front original tires Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed A CAUTION Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO RARY USE ONLY spare tire Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause dam age to the vehicle Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire ground clearance is reduced To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught Maintenance and do it yourself 8 43 MEMO 8 44 Maintenance and do it yourself 9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 9 2 Fuel recommendation 0 0 cece eee eae 9 3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations 9 5 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations 224 secs 24 wewedad waiwe Gaceuees 9 6 SPCCHICAUONS 25 d050 e4 dceankacesaeageacawsee eeeae 9 7 ENGINE ss 222cgecetece sadeeuenens eee eeeeate sa se 9 7 Wheels and tires nannan nananana 9 8 Dimensions and weights suussa aana 9 8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country
50. V S S C M V S S label GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating maximum weight load limit specified for the front or rear axle This informa tion Is located on the F M V S S C M V S S label GCWR Gross Combined Weight rating The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle passengers cargo and trailer Vehicle Capacity Weight Load limit Total load capacity maximum total weight limit specified of the load passengers and cargo for the ve hicle This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer the trailer tongue weight must be in cluded as part of the cargo load This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped Cargo capacity permissible weight of cargo the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your ve hicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Capacity on the Tire and Load ing Information label To get the combined weight of occu pants and cargo add the weight of all occupants then add the total luggage weight Examples are shown in the follow ing illustration Technical and consumer information 9 13 Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load
51. Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Larger children Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided The seat belt may not fit properly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches 142 5 cm tall and weighs between 40 Ibs 18 kg and 80 Ibs 36 kg A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoul der belt in the child s seating position fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdomen The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top middle por tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three point type seat belt The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and 1 13 have a label certifying that it complies with Fed eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck use the shoulder belt without the booster seat A WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is m
52. a reset or connecting the battery cables the display will show 4 8 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Resetting fuel economy The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0 Press the TRIP button repeatedly until the FUEL ECONOMY menu is shown then ei ther Select the Reset key on screen by press ing the ENTER button or Press the TRIP button for more than approxi mately 1 5 seconds Distance to empty MI or km The Distance To Empty DTE mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The DTE is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds When the fuel level is low the DTE display will change to NOTE Ifthe amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small the display just before the ignition switch is turned OFF may con tinue to be displayed When driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momentarily change the display MAINTENANCE 12 31 OUTSIDE 92 F Engine Oil O miles 3 750 Tire Rotation o miles 3 750 Tire Pressure Maintenance items Press the TRIP button to display maintenance information or set maintenance intervals for the following Engine Oil Tire Rotation Tire Pressure if so equipped For setting the Tire Pressure display r
53. allows the driver to get into and out of the driver s seat more easily The drivers seat will slide backward and the steering wheel will move up when the driver s door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK position The driver s seat and steering wheel will return to previous position when the driver s door is closed and the ignition switch is pushed The entry exit function can be adjusted or can celed See Vehicle electronic systems in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section of this manual Restarting the entry exit function If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the entry exit function will be disabled Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the entry exit function You can also restart the entry exit function using the following proce dure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than two times with the ignition key in the LOCK position The entry exit function should now work properly SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH 7 km h When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive positioner iS Operating When the adjusting switch for the driver s seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating
54. and then shift to the manual shift mode When the CVT fluid temperature is high the shift range may upshift in lower rom than usual This is not a malfunction Starting and driving 5 11 Shift lock release lf the battery is discharged the shift selector lever may not be moved from the P Park position even with the brake pedal depressed To move the shift selector lever release the shift lock The shift selector lever can be moved to N Neutral However the steering wheel will be locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON position This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged 5 12 Starting and driving To push the shift lock release complete the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key 2 Apply the parking brake 3 Remove the shift lock release cover as shown 4 Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down 5 Move the shift selector lever to the N Neu tral position while holding down the shift lock release 6 Turn the key to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P Park have a NISSAN dealer check the trans mission as soon as possible A WARNING If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed
55. anti glare feature again press the button on rearview mirrors without compass the button on rearview mirrors equipped with compass The indicator light will turn on For information on the automatic anti glare rear view mirror see Automatic anti glare rearview mirror earlier in this section Reverse tilt down feature if so equipped The reverse tilt down feature will turn the se lected outside mirror surface downward to pro vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle When the ignition switch is in the ON position turn the outside mirror control switch to the left or right position Only one mirror can be selected at a time Move the shift selector lever to R Reverse The selected mirror will turn downward The selected mirror surface will return to its origi Manual folding outside mirrors if so Power folding outside mirrors if so kill eal pNP t Wie eno equipped equipped Push the mi EEEE E E EE The shift selector lever is moved to any po S ie Alors aCe valet Tene A CAUTION sition other than R Reverse Do not manually fold the power folding The outside mirror control switch is set to the mirrors Manually folding the mirrors can neutral position damage the mirrors The ignition switch is turned OFF Press the switch to open or close the mirrors Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 27 NOTE If the outside mirror control switch is in the neutral position neither mi
56. are located on the front and rear center consoles To raise the screen push the upper side of the switch To lower the screen push the lower side of the switch The switch need not be held down A CAUTION Do not place objects such as newspa pers handkerchiefs etc on the screen inlet port Doing so may entangle these objects in the screen when it is extend ing or retracting causing improper op eration or damage to the screen Do not push the sun shade arm with your hands etc as this may deform it Improper operation or damage to the screen may result Instruments and controls 2 41 INTERIOR LIGHT Do not hang any object on the arm rail as this may result in improper operation or damage the screen Do not forcefully pull the screen Doing so may elongate the screen Improper operation or damage to the screen may result The interior light has a three position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position When the switch is in the ON position the interior light illuminates regardless of door position The light will go off after 30 minutes unless the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position When the switch is in the center DOOR position the front and rear personal lights will illuminate under the following con ditions Drivers door is unlocked while the igni tion key is removed from the key cylinder 2 42 Instruments and controls Lights remain on
57. as needed If too much air is added press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed Install the valve stem cap 7 Check the pressure of all other tires including the spare Maintenance and do it yourself 8 35 Size Cold Tire Inflation High Speed Pressure Maximum Load Cold Tire Inflation Pressure o l P225 55R17 95V 230 kPa 33 PSI 240 kPa 35 PSI Front Original Tire P245 45R18 96V 220 kPa 32 PSI 260 kPa 38 PSI P245 45R18 96V 220 kPa 32 PSI 260 kPa 38 PSI T145 80 17 420 kPa 60 PSI R or D depending on tire manufacturer o P225 55R17 95V 230 kPa 33 PSI 240 kPa 35 PSI Rear Original Tire 8 36 Maintenance and do it yourself WDI0394 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information iden tifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also pro vides the tire identification number TIN for safety standard certification The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall 7 H Tire speed rating You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire P215 65R15 95H speed rating 65 15 t t 3 5 WDI0395 Example 1 Tire size example P215 65R15 95H 4 R The R stands for radial 1 P The P indicates the tire is de 5 Two digit n
58. best results say phone numbers as single digits CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel 4 PHONE SEND Press the 4 button to initiate a VR session or answer an incoming call You can also use the 4 4 button to skip through system feedback and to enter commands during a call See List of voice commands and During a call later in this section for more information MSEE PHONE END Press the MORE button to cancel a VR session or end a call GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition For ad ditional command options refer to List of voice commands later in this section Choosing a language You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System using English Spanish or French To change the language perform the following 1 Press and hold the 4 than 5 seconds 2 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND 4 4 button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END MQDE button to select a dif ferent language 3 Press the MODE button button for more For information on speaker adaptation see Speaker adaptation SA mode later in this section 4 The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the lan guage t
59. button 1 6 4 34 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems MIX RPT button When the MIX RPT button is pressed while a compact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Repeat All Repeat Disc Repeat Track Mix All Discs Mix Disc Repeat All Repeat Disc The disc that is currently playing will be repeated Repeat Track The track that is currently playing will be repeated Mix All Disc Tracks from all discs will be played randomly Mix Disc Tracks from the disc that is currently playing will be played randomly Repeat All All discs will be played normally with no special play pattern enabled MP3 MIX RPT mode When the MIX RPT button is pressed while an MP3 compact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Repeat All Repeat Disc Repeat Folder Repeat Track Mix All Disc Mix Disc Mix Folder Repeat All Repeat Disc The disc that is currently playing will be repeated Repeat Folder The folder selected that is cur rently playing will be repeated Repeat Track The track that is currently playing will be repeated Mix All Disc Tracks from all discs will be played randomly Mix Disc Tracks from the disc that is currently playing will be played randomly Mix Folder Tracks from that folder that is cur rently accessed will be played randomly Repeat All All discs will be played normally wit
60. buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 SRS Air Bag Warning Labels located on the sun visors 2 SRS Side Air Bag Warning Labels lo cated on the door pillar SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front air bag supplemental side air bag and curtain side impact air bag systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration 1 51 oO S LRS0100 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light displaying amp in the instrument panel moni tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag supplemental side air bag and curtain side impact air bag and pre tensioner seat belt sys tems The circuits monitored by the supplemental air bag warning light are the diagnosis sensor unit crash zone sensor satellite sensors front air bag modules side air bag modules curtain side impact air bag modules pre tensioner seat belts and all related wiring When the ignition key is in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the supplemental front air bag supplemental side air bag and curtain side impact air bag and pre tensioner seat belt systems need servicing The supplemental air bag warning ligh
61. center ventilators P 4 18 4 Meters and gauges P 2 3 i 24 Outside mirror controls P 3 26 2 Headlight fog light turn signal switch 5 Driver supplemental air bag horn i P 2 21 P 1 37 P 2 27 25 Instrument brightness control P 2 25 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own 3 Steering wheel switch for audio control 6 Security indicator light P 2 16 E A IE cauiene and Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System 7 Cruise control main set switches P 5 14 GUEA if inped P 4 42 4 43 8 Windshield wiper washer switch P 2 19 See the page number indicated in paren if so equipped P 4 42 4 43 i theses for operating details 2 2 instruments and controls METERS AND GAUGES Oe a et RPMx1000 LICO990 SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed Tachometer Warning indicator lights Speedometer Fuel gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge Odometer total twin trip Instruments and controls 2 3 Odometer Twin trip odometer The odometer twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON position The odometer 1 records the total distance the vehicle has been driven The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips Changing the display Push the change button 3 to change the display as follows Trip A gt Trip B Trip _A 2 4 Instruments and controls Resetting the
62. children s access to car keys fe 4 L AC LIC0431 LIC0401 To fold down the driver side of the rear seat reach For models with rear center console the trunk Center armrest through the opening and pull on the strap can be accessed through the access panel be located behind the seat tween the rear seats Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal The rear seats can be locked using the mechani The panel can be locked using the mechanical cal key to prevent unauthorized access key to prevent unauthorized access For more information on keys refer to Keys in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section of this manual Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 7 r a X A WRS0133 LRS0240 Type A Front Type B Rear HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT Adjust the head restraint so the center is level To raise the head restraint pull it up To lower WII ING CENTENO yOUNEATS push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down WARNING Head restraints should be adjusted prop erly as they may provide significant pro tection against injury in an accident Do not remove them Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat 1 8 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT front seats A WARNING e Always adjust the head restraints prop erly as specified in this section Failure to do so
63. complete and you are ready to begin the press the 4 4 button The SA mode will be explained Follow the instructions provided by the system When training is finished the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded The system will ask you to say your name Follow the instructions to register your name 11 The system will announce that speaker ad aptation has been completed and the sys tem is ready The SA mode will stop if The 4 4 button is pressed for more than 5 seconds in SA mode The vehicle begins moving during SA mode The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or LOCK position Training phrases During the SA mode the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases The system will prompt you for each phrase phone book new entry dial three oh four two nine delete call back number setup pair phone memo pad play eight pause nine three two pause seven delete all entries call seven two four zero nine phone book delete entry memo pad record dial star two one seven oh Yes No select ring tone dial eight five six nine two Bluetooth on setup change priority call three one nine oh two nine seven pause pause three oh eight Cancel call back number call star two zero nine five delete phone dial eight three zero five one Home four three pause two nine pause zero delete redial number phone book list names call eight oh five
64. con trolled to produce maximum power and smooth operation The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment NOTE Engine power may be automatically re duced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers Starting the vehicle 1 After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector lever out of the P Park position 2 Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector lever into a driving gear 3 Release the foot brake then gradually start the vehicle in motion 4 Stop the vehicle completely before shifting the selector lever to the P Park position The CVT is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P Park to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position The shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P Park and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK OFF or ACC position Starting and driving 5 9 Shifting After starting the engine fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector lever from P Park to any of the desired shift positions A WARNING Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is
65. display brightness press the xt gt button Pressing the button again will change the display to DAY or NIGHT display Then adjust the brightness by moving the joy stick right or left If no operation is done within 10 seconds or if the BACK button is pressed the display will return to the previous display VENTILATORS WHAO0686 Center Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventilator slides Open or close the ventilators by using the dial Move the dial toward the to open the ven tilators or toward the amp to close them 4 18 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Rear WHA0688 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER automatic O S pRiver Temperature control dial driver s side fan speed control button AUTO climate control ON button 7 front defroster button DUAL passenger side temperature control ON OFF button 7 Temperature control dial passenger s i 2 3 4 MODE manual air flow control button 5 6 side 8 GS Air recirculation button 9 QY Rear window defroster switch 10 A C air conditioner ON OFF button 11 OFF button for climate control system LHA0681 A WARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure
66. do likewise Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON 8 position See Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual 5 8 Starting and driving STARTING THE ENGINE Apply the parking brake Move the shift selector lever to P Park or N Neutral P Park is recommended The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector lever is in any of the driving positions Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition switch to START Release the switch when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure f the engine is very hard to start in ex tremely cold weather or when restarting depress the accelerator pedal a little ap proximately 1 3 to the floor and hold it and then crank the engine Release the switch and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Crank the engine for 5 6 seconds After cranking the engine release the accel erator pedal Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turn ing the ignition switch to START Release the switch when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure A CAUTION Do not operate the
67. equipped with state of the art electronic circuits to enhance ra dio reception These circuits are designed to extend reception range and to enhance the qual ity of that reception However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle even when the finest equipment is used These char acteristics are completely normal in a given re ception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system 4 22 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Reception conditions will constantly change be cause of vehicle movement Buildings terrain signal distance and interference from other ve hicles can work against ideal reception De scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception FM RADIO RECEPTION Range FM range is normally limited to 25 30 miles 40 48 km with monaural single chan nel FM having slightly more range than stereo FM External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 miles 40 km The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver FM signals follow a line of sight path exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light For example they will reflect off objects Fade and drift As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter the signals wi
68. filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth To remove the air cleaner filter Loosen the screw 2 Disconnect the electrical connector 3 Unlatch the clips and remove the air cleaner cover Remove the air cleaner filter 8 16 Maintenance and do it yourself A WARNING e Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth ers to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops the flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed Doing so could result in serious injury IN CABIN MICROFILTER The in cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors The filter is located behind the glove box Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for change intervals To replace the filter perform the following proce dure 1 Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins Remove the glove box from the opening and let it hang by the cord a O7 Ge c 2 Remove the filter cover from the intake unit by disengaging the 2 hook tabs at the bot tom of the cover te NOTE The filter is marked UP with an arrow The end of the filte
69. for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instruc tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel lular phones When prompted for a PIN code enter 1234 from the handset The PIN code 1234 has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed The system asks you to say a name for the phone If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if more than one phone is paired and the name sounds too much like a name already used the system tells you then prompts you for a name again 4 48 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 6 The system asks you to assign a priority level F The priority level determines which phone is active when more than one paired Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle Follow the instructions provided by the system or refer to Setup later in this section for more information on changing priorities 7 The system will ask if you would like to select a custom ring tone Follow the instruc tions provided by the system or refer to Setup later in this section for more infor mation on selecting ringtones Making a call by entering a phone number Main Menu Call A Number speak digits Dial 1 Press the 4 button on steering wheel A tone will sound 2 Say Call The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available co
70. ft 10 m away from the vehicle The operating distance de pends upon the conditions around the vehicle The remote keyless entry function will not func tion under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range When the doors or the trunk are open or not closed securely When the Intelligent Key battery is dis charged AA CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle A CAUTION After locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles Locking doors 1 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion 2 Close all doors 3 Push the button on the Intelligent Key 4 The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once 5 All doors will be locked WPD0360 Unlocking doors 1 Pushthe button onthe Intelligent Key 2 The hazard warning lights flash once 3 Pushthe button again within 1 minute to unlock all doors All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the button Opening any doors Pushing the ignition switch Inserting the mechanical key into the ignition switch Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 13 The interior light illuminates for 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in
71. gt Song title Channel number displays the channel num ber of the selected satellite radio station Category name displays the category name of the selected satellite radio station Channel name displays the channel name of the selected satellite radio station Artist name displays the name of the artist host or weather condition of the selected satellite radio station Song title displays the song title show name or temperature of the selected satel lite radio station Clock operation Pressing the CLOCK DISP button displays the clock with the radio on or off Press the CLOCK DISP button again to turn off the clock display For additional information on setting the clock see Adjusting the time earlier in this section pause mute button Type A only To mute or pause the audio sound press the X pause mute button Press the button again to resume the audio sound FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM SAT band select Pressing the RADIO button will change the band as follows AM FM gt SAT satellite if so equipped When the RADIO button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played No satellite radio reception is available when the RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and an tenna are installed and an XM or SIRIUS sat ellite radio service subscri
72. is pressed again during the eject sequence the entire disc eject sequence will be can celed When this button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played CD IN indicator The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer in CD mode only Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 35 13 amp CD eject button 14 POWER VOLUME control knob 1 15 Station and CD select 1 6 buttons 16 TUNE TRACK and AUDIO control knob SEEK I lt tRack TUNE 4 FoLDERecat gt 5 pea cD FM AM SAT AUX 10 6 7 9 8 CD6 CHANGER 45 13 BASS MID TREBLE FADE BAL ANCE and SSV if so equipped No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM or SIRIUS satel lite radio service subscription is active oy AUDIO EEC C3 M SAT RADIO FM AM SAT RADIO WITH voLume ue COMPACT DISC CD CHANGER For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions earlier in this section Satellite radio not available in Alaska No satellite radio reception is available and NO 1 SEEK TRACK button 2 FN button SAT is displayed when the SAT button iS 9 TUNE FOLDER CAT button 8 AM button pressed unless optiona
73. key Closing the doors Alarm and warning when the engine Starts When the Intelligent Key system warning light S blinks red and the outside buzzer sounds make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Warning for low battery power When the Intelligent Key battery is low the Intel ligent Key system warning light aH will blink green for about 30 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position This warning is to let you know that the battery of the Intelligent Key will run down soon Replace it with a new one Refer to Battery replacement in the Main tenance and do it yourself section NISSAN recommends replacing the battery at a NISSAN dealer Preventing the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle If you lock all doors using the power door lock switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle all of the doors unlock immediately and the buzzer will warn you when the door is closed TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE When pushing the door The front door beep sounds for approximately 2 Thedcortannothe locked Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle and push the door handle request switch seconds handle request switch The front door beep sounds for approximately 10 The ignition knob is not Turn the ignition knob to LOCK seconds turned to LOCK position The key warning light in the instrument panel The Intelligent Key is not in Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you
74. key an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the following pro cedures 1 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 2 18 Instruments and controls 2 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 sec onds 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs NISSAN rec ommends placing the registered key on a sepa rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys tem CONT ASSY IMMOBILIZER ANT ASSY IMMOBILIZER This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including inter ference that may cause undesired opera tion of the device CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER S AUTHORITY TO OPER ATE THE EQUIPMENT SS LIC0994 Security indicator light The security indicator light is located on the instrument panel near the windshield The security indicator light blinks whenever the
75. limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Occupants Luggage Trailer Tongue Weight z 6G Lo 150 Ib x 2 300 Iib 30 Ib x2 60 Ib 300 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14kg 27 kg 135 kg Luggage OA 150 Ib x 2 300 Ib 30 Ib x 2 60 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14 kg 27 kg Occupants Lk Luggage REERE ECCE 150 Ib x 5 750 Ib 30 Ib x 5 150 Ib 70 kg 340 kg 14kg 70 kg Occupants Example 9 14 Technical and consumer information Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 740 Ib 336 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 1 040 Ib 472 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 500 Ib 227 kg LT10152 Steps for determining correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 X 150 650 Ibs or 640 340 5 X 70 300 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being lo
76. may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Informa tion Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a re placement by writing to Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS US only If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addi tion to notifying NISSAN If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot be come involved in individual problems be tween you your dealer or NISSAN To contact NHTSA you may call the Ve hicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department toll free at 1 800 NISSAN 1 READINESS FOR INSPECTION MAINTENANCE I M TEST Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces your vehicle may be re quired to be in what is call
77. not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage 5 10 Starting and driving If the ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC for any reason while the vehicle is in R Reverse N Neutral or any drive position the key cannot be turned to LOCK and be removed from the ignition switch Additionally the selector lever cannot be moved to R Reverse from N Neutral or any drive position for about 3 minutes after the igni tion switch Is turned to the ACC or OFF position The selector lever can be moved from R Re verse to P Park with the key in the OFF or ACC position If this occurs perform the following steps 1 Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stopped 2 Turn the key to the ON position 3 Depress the foot brake pedal 4 Move the shift selector lever to P Park or N Neutral to restart the vehicle P is pre ferred Move the shift selector lever to P Park to park the vehicle and turn the igni tion key to the LOCK position to remove the key P Park Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped The brake pedal must be depressed to move the se lector lever from N Neutral or any drive position to P Park Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first then shift the selector lever into the
78. occupant or object on the seat and seat belt tension Based on informa tion from the sensors only one front air bag may inflate in a crash depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted Additionally the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions depending on the weight de tected on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used If the front passenger air bag is OFF the passenger air bag status light will be illumi nated if the seat is unoccupied the light will not be illuminated but the air bag will be off See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section for further details One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system If you have any questions about your air bag system please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability you may also contact NISSAN Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner s Manual When a supplemental front air bag inflates a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by the release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken to not inhale it as it may cause Irritation and chok ing Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Supplemental front air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the i
79. of a collision 5 9 27 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities The actual refill capacities may be slightly different When refilling follow the procedure described in the Maintenance and do it yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity Fuel Engine oil 6 Drain and Refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change Cooling system With reservoir CVT fluid Power steering fluid PSF Brake fluid Multi purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system oll Windshield washer fluid Capacity Approximate US measure Imp measure Liter 20 gal 16 5 8 gal 75 6 4 1 2 qt 3 3 4 at 4 2 4 1 4 qt 3 1 2 qt 4 0 2 1 4 gal 1 7 8 gal 8 5 See a NISSAN dealer for service Refill to the proper level according to the instructions in the Maintenance and do it yourself section 1 For further details see Fuel recommendation 2 For further details see Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 3 Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 will damage the CVT which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty 4 Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer 5 For further details see Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations 6 For further details see Engine Oil in the Maintena
80. of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position firmly pull the belt and release it Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor 3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown 4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three point seat belts have a locking mechanism for child restraint installation It is referred to as the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode or child restraint mode When the ALR is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Once retracted the seat belt is in the Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode See Child re straints later in this section for more information The ALR should be used only for child re straint installation During normal seat belt use by a passenger the locking mode should not be activated If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat bel
81. off Initially if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a door is opened and left open the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes If another door is opened during the 5 minutes then the 5 minute timer is reset To turn the autolight system off turn the switch to the OFF Dd or Z position Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor 1 located in the top side of the instrument panel The autolight sensor controls the autolight if it is cov ered the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the key in the ON position your vehicle s battery could become discharged Headlight beam select To select the high beam function push the lever forward The high beam lights come on and the O light illuminates 2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam 3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off Battery saver system If the ignition switch is turned OFF while the headlight switch is in the Dd or 20 posi tion the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes Instruments and controls 2 23 A CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature au tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time you should turn the head light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Feature OFF Flash to pass feat
82. or Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light or O Brake warning light Charge warning light Door open warning light Engine oil pressure warning light A m Intelligent Key system warning light Low fuel warning light Low tire pressure warning light ee CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine The following lights will come on EH BRAKE or Q 1 BG A lt _ tE o PE D D m If equipped the following lights come on briefly Low windshield washer fluid warning light P Position selecting warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Supplemental air bag warning light Trunk lid open warning light Continuously Variable Transmission CVT indicator light Continuously Variable Transmission CVT position indicator light CRUISE main switch indicator light and then go off ABS or A o SLIP GeF CVT t KEY BPS W SET Cruise SET switch indicator light Front passenger air bag status light High beam indicator light Blue SERVICE Malfunction indicator light MIL SOON SLIP Slip indicator light if so equipped TCS Traction control system off indicator light if so equipped Turn signal hazard indicator lights Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light if so equipped If any light fails to come on it may indicate a burned out bulb o
83. own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B New entry Use the New Entry command to store a new name in the system When prompted by the system say the name you would like to give the new entry For example say Mary If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if the name sounds too much like a name already stored the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Once the system accepts the name and you confirm it is correct the system asks for a location Home Office Mobile or Other For example say Home The system acknowledges the location and asks for a number For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers earlier in this section for more information The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers choose Store The system confirms the name location and number The system then asks if you would like to store another location for the same name If you do not wish to store another location the system ends the VR session Edit Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone book entry or to add a 2nd 3rd or 4th phone number to an existing entry When prompted by the system say the name of the entry you wish to edit The system acknow
84. pressure warning light is lit or flashing continuously one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If equipped the system also displays pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not de tect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving For more details refer to Low tire pres sure warning light in the Instruments and controls section Tire pressure informa tion in the Display screen heater air 8 32 Maintenance and do it yourself conditioner and audio and phone sys tems section Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driv ing section and Flat tire in the In case of emergency section Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures including the spare often and always prior to long dis tance trips The recommended tire pres sure specifications are shown on the F M V S S C M V S S label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar Tire pressures should be checked regularly because Most tires naturally lose air over time Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or
85. repair shop The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level Use the dipstick to check the oil level See Engine oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause se rious damage to the engine almost imme diately Such damage is not covered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so KEY Intelligent Key system warning light The Intelligent Key system warning light illumi nates green when the ignition switch can be turned The Intelligent Key system warning light illuminates red when the ignition switch cannot be turned The Intelligent Key system warning light blinks red if the Intelligent Key is taken outside of the vehicle while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position f the Intelligent Key system warning light blinks make sure of the location of the Intel ligent Key as soon as possible The Intelli gent Key should be carried by the driver while operating the vehicle The Intelligent Key system warning light turns off about 10 seconds after the Intelli gent Key is brought inside the vehicle The Intelligent Key system warning light blinks green indicating that the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged See Intelligent Key system in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section D Low fuel warning light
86. seat belts and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle A WARNING e Once a supplemental front air bag supplemental side air bag or curtain side impact air bag has inflated the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced Additionally if any of the supplemental front air bags inflate the activated pre tensioner seat belts must also be replaced The air bag mod ule and pre tensioner seat belt system should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer The air bag module and pre tensioner seat belt system cannot be repaired The supplemental front air bag side air bag and curtain side impact air bag sys tems and the pre tensioner seat belt system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle If you need to dispose of the supple mental air bag pre tensioner seat belt system or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Correct supplemental air bag and pre tensioner seat belt sys tem disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 53 2 Instruments and controls Instrument panel ic wedectsecxce saci ceneueeteena cats 2 2 Meters and gauges ws 4ncinserivcewe
87. similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle lf a computer or similar equipment or a DC AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER A WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident Be alert and drive defensively at all times Obey all traffic regulations Avoid excessive speed high speed cornering or sudden steering maneuvers because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle As with any ve hicle loss of control could result in a colli sion with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways Be attentive at all times and avoid driving when tired Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs including p
88. spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS A CAUTION e The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH 25 km h the TPMS may not operate correctly Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly Low windshield washer fluid warning light This light comes on when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level Add windshield washer fluid as necessary See Window washer fluid in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual P P position selecting warning SHIFT light The light blinks red and warning buzzer beeps when the selector lever is not in the P position and you are outside the vehicle with the Intelli gent Key When the warning light blinks move the selector lever to the P position and return the ignition switch to the LOCK position 4 Seat belt warning light and chime The light and chime rem
89. tether strap First secure the child restraint with the seat belt or LATCH rear outboard seat positions only as applicable 1 Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor point which is located directly behind the child seat 2 Remove the head restraint Store it in a secure location 3 Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback 1 22 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 4 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor bracket that provides the straightest instal lation 5 Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat consult your NISSAN dealer for de tails CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH A WARNING Attach LATCH compatible child re straints only at the locations shown For the LATCH lower anchor locations see Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil dren System LATCH in this section If a Child restraint is not secured properly your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident e The LATCH anchors are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over
90. the color of the light will be come reddish If one or more of the above signs appear contact a NISSAN dealer Instruments and controls 2 21 A CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Lighting A When turning the switch to the FPA posi tion the front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights come on 2 When turning the switch to the 2 posi tion the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on 2 22 Instruments and controls LICO561 Autolight system The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically The autolight system can Turn on the headlights front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights au tomatically when it is dark Turn off all the lights when it is light Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after you turn the key to OFF and all doors are closed NOTE Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad justed for vehicles with navigation system See Vehicle electronic systems in the Display screen heater air conditioner au dio and phone systems section later in this manual To turn on the autolight system 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi tion 2 Turn the ignition key to ON 3 The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and
91. the cooling fan is running The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water If coolant is leaking the water pump belt is missing or loose or the cooling fan does not run stop the en gine A WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands hair jewelry or clothing to come into contact with or get caught in engine belts or the engine cooling fan The engine cooling fan can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high In case of emergency 6 9 6 After the engine cools down check the cool ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer 6 10 Incase of emergency TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle all State Provincial in Canada and local regulations for towing must be followed Incorrect towing equipment could dam age your vehicle Towing instructions are avail able from a NISSAN dealer Local service opera tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions A WARNING Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck A CAUTION When
92. the window pull the switch up 2 38 Instruments and controls Rear power window switch The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows To open the window push the switch and hold it down Q To close the window pull the switch up Locking passengers windows When the window lock button is depressed only the driver s side window can be opened or closed Push it again to cancel the window lock function LICO410 Automatic operation To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation press the window switch down only driver s side shown to the second detent and release it it need not be held The window auto matically opens all the way To stop the window lift the switch up while the window is opening To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation pull the switch up to the second detent and release it it need not be held Auto reverse function The auto reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window oc curs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the window If the control unit detects something
93. the windshield and impair driver vision REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn Q Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield 2 Push the release tab then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove 3 Remove the wiper blade 4 Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place A CAUTION After wiper blade replacement return the wiper arm to its original position otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass otherwise the arms may be dam aged from wind pressure Maintenance and do it yourself 8 19 X R iaae Oonan SS WDI0337 Be careful not to let anything get into the washer nozzle A This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation If something gets into the nozzle remove it with a needle or small pin 8 20 Maintenance and do it yourself BRAKES If the brakes do not operate properly have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer SELF ADJUSTING BRAKES Your vehicle is equipped with self adjusting brakes The front and rear disc type brakes self adjust every time the brake pedal is applied A WARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators When a brake pad requires re placement a high pitched scra
94. under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes repeated short distance driving at cold out side temperatures driving in dusty conditions extensive idling towing a trailer stop and go commuting Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for the maintenance schedule AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger ant HFC 134a R 134a and the oil NISSAN A C system oil Type S or the exact equiva lents 9 6 Technical and consumer information A CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air condition ing system and will require the replace ment of all air conditioner system components The refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth s ozone layer Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth s atmosphere certain government regula tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys tem service A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger ant Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model VQ35DE Type Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC Cylinder arrangement 6 cylinder V block Slanted at 60 Bore x Stroke in mm
95. vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS mal function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alter nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Additional information The TPMS does not monitor the tire pres sure of the spare tire The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 Starting and driving 5 3 km h Also this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure the vehicle
96. vehicle using the master keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle These keys have a transponder chip in the key head The master key can be used for all the locks To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone give them the Intelligent Key only not the mechanical key Never leave these keys in the vehicle Additional or replacement keys If you still have a key the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys Your dealer can dupli cate your existing key As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration This is be cause the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System After the registration process these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 3 Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle Do not allow the immobilizer system key which contains an electrical transponder to come into contact with salt water This could affect system function 3 4 Pre driving checks and adjustments DOORS A WARNING e Always have t
97. washer fluid warning Continuously Vari Brake warning light 2 10 ght ae P position selecting cator light Ce warning light CRUISE main Seat belt warning switch indicator light light and chime light Cruise SET switch Supplemental air 2 10 bag warning light light Front passenger air Engine oil pressure 2 11 warning light E e ot Intelligent Key 2 11 dla o system warning light indicator light MIL D Low fuel warning 2 11 if so equipped 0 8 Illustrated table of contents Traction control system off indicator light if so equipped Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light if so equipped Illustrated table of contents 0 9 MEMO 0 10 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Deals acca E E seca Dewektenewede 1 2 Child Testa Sccck csuwtacncucsiniekyweaweteweees 1 18 Front manual seat adjustment Precautions on child restraints 0 000 1 18 Passe el SSC eweteunaeeee ren peewedaeteces 1 2 Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Front power seat adjustment System LATCH 0c cece cece eens 1 20 for driver s seat and if so equipped for Top tether strap child restraint 05 1 21 Sanaa Sat seat oo ot ee ma Child restraint installation using LATCH 1 22 Folding rear seat if so equipped 005 1 6 a oe Child restraint installation using the seat Head restraint adjustment 0000 1 8 f
98. your finger into to the recess Q and slide the armrest forward to the desired position Console box storage Pull up on the latch to open the console box Remove the inside tray to store a large object The console box may be used for storage of cellular phones You can route a cord through the access notch 1 to the power outlet inside the console box REAR CENTER CONSOLE if so equipped Pull up on the lever to open the console box The light inside the rear center console box may be turned on 1 and off 2 with the switch COVERED STORAGE BOX Push the bottom center of the lid to open Instruments and controls 2 35 The cargo nets help keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while the vehicle is in motion GROCERY HOOKS CARGO NETS The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and can be used to hang a standard size plastic AWARNING grocery bag e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or A CAUTION shifting In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal Do not apply a total load of more than 20 ed Ibs 9 kg to a single grocery hook a Be sure to secure all four hooks into the retainers The cargo restrained in the net must not exceed 30 Ibs 13 6 kg or the net may not stay secured 2 36 Instruments and controls To install a cargo net attach the net to the retain ers To remove a cargo net detach the net from the ret
99. 0671 Trip time The trip time mode displays the trip time since the last reset The maximum time that can be displayed by the Trip Time screen is 99 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds Resetting trip time The Trip Time calculation can be reset to 0 Press the TRIP INFO button for more than approxi mately 2 seconds CLOCK The digital clock displays the time when the igni tion key is in OFF ACC or ON To enable the clock display press the CLOCK DISP button If the power supply is disconnected the clock will not indicate the correct time Readjust the time Adjusting the time The audio system must be turned off to adjust the time To adjust the time press and hold the CLOCK DISP button for more than approximately 1 5 seconds Hour Adjust will appear on the screen and the hours will start flashing Press the SEEK or TUNE button to adjust the hour Press the CLOCK DISP button again Minute Adjust will appear on the screen and the minutes will start flashing Press the SEEK or TUNE button to adjust the minutes Press the CLOCK DISP button again Clock Is Set will appear on the screen NOTE If you enter the clock adjustment mode and do not press any button for approximately 7 seconds the screen will change to Clock Is Set The screen will exit out of the clock adjustment mode and return to the audio or off screen HOW TO USE THE AUDIO BUTTON for control panel The audio system must be turned on to ac
100. 25 4 gt GPS Time 06 25 Hours Minutes Auto Adjust Select Time Zone Setting daylight savings time Use the Daylight Saving Time key to adjust the clock to daylight savings time ON The displayed time advances by 1 hour OFF The current time is displayed re eee CLOCK SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS TIME ZONE Hours Hours q gt Minutes Minutes q gt Auto Adjust Select Time Zone Newfoundland Adjusting the time to the GPS Selecting the time zone 2 Select one of the following zones depend Select the Auto Adjust key 1 Select the Select Time Zone key ing on the current location The time will be reset to the GPS time The TIME ZONE screen will appear Pacific zone Mountain zone Central zone Eastern zone Atlantic zone Newfoundland zone After selection the CLOCK SETTINGS screen will appear Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 17 The GPS time manual time corresponding to the selected zone will be displayed Pacific zone has been set as the initial default setting Beep setting With this option ON a beep will sound if any audio button is pressed Navigation settings Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding these set tings Guidance voice settings Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding these set tings 21 BUTTON To change the
101. 25 Bluetooth hands free phone system 4 43 Boosterseats 22 0004 1 33 Brake Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 19 Brake fluid ee a me Kaos 2 eR ewe a 8 11 Brake light See stop light 8 27 Brake system wo 6 oa 2 ea ae aw ew 5 18 Brake warning light 2 10 Brake wear Indicators 2 16 8 20 Parking brake operation 59 13 Self adjusting brakes 8 20 Brak S co w ae ee Siw e hoe BS A wc 8 20 Break in schedule 5 15 Brightness control Instrument panel 2 25 Brightness contrast button 4 18 Bulb check instrument panel 2 9 Bulb replacement 8 27 C Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants n aooaa 9 2 Car phone or CBradio 4 43 Cargo See vehicle loading information 9 12 CD care and cleaning 4 41 CD changer See audio system 4 33 4 39 CD player See audio system 4 32 Child restraint with top tether strap 1 21 Child restraints 1 12 1 13 1 18 1 20 Precautions on child restraints 04 1 18 1 26 1 33 Top tether strap anchor point locations 1 22 Child safety rear door lock 3 6 Chimes audible reminders 2 16 Cleaning exterior and interior 7 2 Clock models with navigation system 4 16 models without navigation system 4 5 Glock Set ca eke a b
102. 32 Instruments and controls A CAUTION e Do not use for anything other than sunglasses e Do not leave sunglasses in the sun glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight The heat may damage the sunglasses WIC1011 Front CUP HOLDERS A CAUTION Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink If the liquid is hot it can scald you or your passenger Use only soft cups in the cup holder Hard objects can injure you in an accident To open the front cup holders push the cup holder lid To close lower the cup holder lid and push down until it clicks in place The plastic cup insert may be removed for clean ing The rear cup holders are located in the fold down armrest in the rear seat back or in the rear center console LICO423 Rear Type A Rear Type B To open the cup holders on the rear fold down To open the cup holders on the rear center con armrest lift the cup holder lid To close lower the sole push the button The cup holder lid will lid open To close gently push the lid toward the center Instruments and controls 2 33 GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle Use the mechanical key when locking or unlocking 2 the glove box A WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop 2 34 Instruments and controls CONSOLE BOX Armrest Insert
103. 4 If the fuse is open A replace it with an equivalent good fuse 5 Push the fuse box cover to install 6 If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 23 LDIO0456 8 24 Maintenance and do it yourself BATTERY REPLACEMENT INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol lows 1 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part Use a cloth to protect the casing Replace the battery with a new one Recommended battery CR2025 or equiva lent Do not touch the internal circuit and elec tric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction Hold the battery by the edges Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity Make sure that the side faces the bot tom of the case 4 Close the lid securely as illustrated 5 Operate the buttons to check the operation See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the fo
104. 5 Display controls see control panel buttons 4 2 4 6 Distance to empty 6 ee ees 4 3 4 8 DOOMIOCKS s amos 6 4 enw Sone ee oa 3 4 Door open warning 5 4 6 Door open warning light 2 10 Drive belt 2 eee ee ee 8 14 Drive positioner Automatic 3 28 Driving Cold weather driving 5 23 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 04 5 9 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 E ECONOMY fuel o eea o are oe we eee S 5 16 Emission control information label 9 10 Emission control system warranty 9 25 Engine Before starting the engine 5 8 Block heater sas 4 004 amp ew ad a 5 25 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 008 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 Changing engine oil 8 9 Changing engine oil filter a 8 10 Checking engine coolant level 8 7 Checking engine oil level 8 8 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Engine cooling system 8 7 Engine Oilo ew e wes a ninaa ale a a 8 8 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation aoaaa aaa ae 9 5 Engine oil pressure warning light 2 11 Engine oil viscosity 9 5 Engine serialnumber 9 10 Engine specifications 9 7 Starting the engine 5 8 English metric setting
105. 5 The hazard warning lights flash twice and 3 10 Pre driving checks and adjustments the outside buzzer sounds twice NOTE Doors lock with the door handle request switch while a mechanical key is in the igni tion switch or the ignition switch is pushed in Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch while any door is open However doors lock with the me chanical key even if any door is open Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you However when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle doors can be locked with an other Intelligent Key A CAUTION After locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles or the trunk opener switch When locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession be fore operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been de tected by the Intelligent Key system Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci dentally locked in the vehicle lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system Whe
106. 55 MPH 88 km h then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 10 seconds 3 Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 60 MPH 86 96 km h for at least 9 minutes 4 Stop the vehicle 5 Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH 55 km h and maintain the speed for 20 seconds 6 Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times 7 Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH 88 km h and maintain the speed for at least 3 min utes 9 26 Technical and consumer information 8 Stop the vehicle Place the transmission se lector lever in the P Park or N Neutral position 9 Turn the engine off 10 Repeat steps 1 8 at least one more time If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted repeat the preceding step Any safe driving mode is accept able between steps Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed EVENT DATA RECORDERS Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of computers that monitor and control a num ber of systems to optimize performance and help service technicians with diagno sis and repair Some of the computers monitor emission control systems braking systems engine systems transmission systems tire pressure systems and airbag systems Some data about vehicle opera tion may be stored in the computers for use during servicing Other data may be stored if a crash event occurs For example ve hicle speed brake application
107. F or LOCK position before servicing drive belt The engine could rotate unexpectedly 1 Visually inspect the belt s for signs of un usual wear Cuts fraying or looseness If the belt is in poor condition or is loose have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer 2 Have the belts checked regularly for condi tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide SPARK PLUGS REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Platinum tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace platinum tipped A spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer Fol low the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Do not service platinum tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re gapping e Always replace spark plugs with rec ommended or equivalent ones A WARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely A CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re move the spark plugs An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs If replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer for assistance Maintenance and do it yourself 8 15 AIR CLEANER The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Mainte nance Guide When replacing the filter wipe the inside of the air cleaner
108. FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control This manual was prepared to help you under stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles kilome ters of driving pleasure Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov ering your vehicle The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your ve hicle Additionally a separate Customer Care Lemon Law Booklet U S only will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle as well as clarify your rights under your state s lemon law Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best When you require any service or have any questions they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle please read this Own er s Manual carefully This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements as sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle A WARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE MINDERS FOR SAFETY Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for you and your passengers e NEVER drive under the influenc
109. Forward button While playing a compact disc without MP3 press the TUNE button rewind or gt fast forward the compact disc will play while rewind ing or fast forwarding When the button is re leased the compact disc will return to normal play speed MP3 TUNE a CAT FOLDER button While playing an MP3 press the TUNE button or P to scan forward or back ward through available folders To fast forward or rewind through an audio track press the TUNE button or gt formore than 1 5 seconds a Gi SEEK button When the SEEK button M _ is pressed for less than 1 5 seconds while a CD or MP3 CD is playing the track or file being played returns to its beginning Press button several times to skip back through tracks or files The CD or MP3 CD will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the SEEK button gt I button is pressed for less than 1 5 seconds while a CD or MP3 CD is playing the next track or file will start to play from its beginning Press PI button several times to skip through tracks or files The CD or MP3 CD will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track or file on the CD or MP8 CD is skipped through the first track or file will be played If there are multiple CDs in the CD changer when the last track or file is skipped through the next CD will start to play CD select buttons To play another CD that has been loaded press a CD select
110. H compatible child restraint the vehicle seat belts can be used See Child restraint installation using the seat belts later in this section In general child restraints are also designed to be installed with the lap portion of a lap shoulder seat belt Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and small children of various sizes When selecting any child restraint keep the following points in mind Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child s height and weight Always follow all recommended procedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated 1 19 WRS0718 LATCH system anchor locations LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERS FOR CHILDREN SYSTEM LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with L
111. HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 44 Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission CVT TOs ce ee ee eee Seow Ot he me ees Se 8 11 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 04 5 9 Selector lever lock release 5 12 Travel See registering your vehicle in another COU Px s 8 dnd eh is kh eas as oe we de 9 9 THO DURON es e ola a ae hd eR aE a 4 3 4 7 Tip odometer s 2 Serer ed OH ee ws 2 4 Tip time cscs uaa soa ew ew Se he ew 4 4 Trunk access through the rearseat 1 6 Trunk lid lock opener lever 3 19 Trunk IQIE 6 eb dee GS Sk SS oe Se ew 2 44 Turn signal switch 6 2 264 amp a 4 2 25 U Uniform tire quality grading 9 24 V Vany MION s 6 4 a o aaa a a a S 3 24 Vehicle dimensions and weights Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch 2 29 Vehicle dynamic control VDC system 5 21 Vehicle electronic system 4 13 Vehicle identification 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN Chassis number 00 50s 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Vehicle loading information 9 12 Vehicle recovery a 6 es 6 12 Vehicle security system 04 5 2 16 Vehicle security system NISSAN vehicle immobi lizer system engine start 2 18 3 3 5 7 MISON ox de Bho ho Ss Wee kt 3 24 Ww Warning Air bag warning light 1 52 2 13 Anti lock brake warning light 2
112. ING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pres sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire follow the instructions be low Stopping the vehicle 1 Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic 2 Turn on the hazard warning flashers 3 Park ona level surface and apply the parking
113. LATCH lower anchors LRSO666 Rear facing rigid mounted step 2 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments LRS0673 Rear facing step 3 4 Before placing the child in the child restraint hold the child restraint near the LATCH at tachment and use force to push the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place It should not move more than 1 in 25 mm If it does move more than 1 in 25 mm pull again on the anchor attachments to further tighten the child restraint If you are unable to properly secure the restraint move the re straint to another seating position and try again or try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 25 LRS0674 Rear facing step 4 5 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 2 through 4 CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS A WARNING Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front pass
114. OFF switch PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL lf the cruise control system malfunctions it cancels automatically The SET indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver f the SET indicator light blinks turn the cruise control switch off and have the sys tem checked by a NISSAN dealer oN gt 5 14 Starting and driving The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control switch is turned ON while pushing the ACCEL RES COAST SET or CANCEL switch To properly set the cruise control system use the following proce dures A WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed On winding or hilly roads On slippery roads rain snow ice etc In very windy areas Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be tween 25 89 MPH 40 144 km h without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal To turn on the cruise control push the main switch The CRUISE indicator light in the instru ment panel comes on To set cruising speed accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it The SET indicator light in the instrument panel comes on Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
115. ON To avoid draining the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 43 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you are an owner of a Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is paired to the in vehicle phone module no other phone connect ing procedure is required Your phone is auto matically connected with the in vehicle phone 4 44 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems module when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position with the paired cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mended phone list
116. Personal giS ontdveusaese niiki CAERE ears 2 43 POON cogncenn seed E E S E 2 43 ROOM TE E A E EE E E anne 2 44 eA E a E e T E TE TEEN 2 44 HomeLink universal transceiver 0005 2 44 Programming HomeLink s 2 esived eee sce wee bes 2 45 Programming HomeLink for Canadian CUSIOMClS goede tect aencetdacaetieeeretanee ce 2 46 Operating the HomeLink universal eiae E ce cecaedseeecan chew aes teow eae 2 46 Programming trouble diagnosis 4 2 47 Clearing the programmed information 2 47 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button 2 47 If your vehicle is stolen 00 cece eee ees 2 47 INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 Display screen Navigation system P 4 2 P 4 6 10 Display screen Navigation system controls P 4 2 P 4 6 11 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 37 12 Glove box P 2 34 13 Audio system controls P 4 22 14 Climate controls P 4 19 15 Storage P 2 31 16 Power outlet P 2 30 17 Shift selector lever P 5 9 18 Hazard warning flasher switch P 2 26 19 Passenger air bag status light P 1 46 20 Ignition switch P 5 6 21 Tilt telescopic steering wheel controls P 3 22 22 Traction control system TCS off switch if so equipped P 2 28 or Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch if so equipped P 2 29 23 Rear sonar system off switch if so equipped P 2 29 20 19 18 1716 15 14 13 1 Side and
117. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum tongue load To determine the Gross Trailer Weight weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo that are normally in the trailer when it is towed Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified rat ings Example Gross Vehicle Weight GVW as weighed onascale including passengers cargo and hitch 4 446 Ib 2016 kg Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR from F M V S S C M V S S certification label 4 546 lb 2062 kg Maximum Towing Load from Towing Load Specification chart 1 000 lb 454 kg 4 546 Ib 2062 kg GVWR 4 446 lb 2016 kg GVW 100 Ib 45 kg Available for tongue weight 1 000 Ib 454 kg Capacity available for towing 100 Ib 45 kg Available tongue weight 1 000 Ib 454 kg Available capacity 10 tongue weight The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the pa
118. TI GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR The inside mirror is designed so that it automati cally dims according to the intensity of the head lights of the vehicle following you The automatic anti glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature is operating To turn off the automatic anti glare feature press the O button for inside mirrors without compass WPD0333 With compass the button for inside mirrors with compass The indicator light will turn off To turn on the automatic anti glare feature again press the button for inside mirrors without compass the button for inside mirrors with compass The indicator light will turn on Some vehicles are also equipped with automatic anti glare outside mirrors For additional informa tion see Automatic anti glare outside mirrors later in this section For information on HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver operation see the HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the Instrument and controls sec tion of this manual For information on the compass display if so equipped see Compass display in the Instru ments and controls section of this manual NOTE Do not hang any objects over the sensors 2 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors resulting in improper operation Pr
119. UEL DU e owns DE SECOURS T XXX XX R XX XXX kPa XX psi CONDUCTEUR Tire and loading information label 4 Cold tire pressure Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 Q Seating capacity The maximum num ber of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle 2 Vehicle load limit See loading infor km at moderate speeds The recom mation in the Technical and con mended cold tire inflation is set by the sumer information section manufacturer to provide the best bal ance of tire wear vehicle handling driveability tire noise etc up to the vehicle s GVWR Tire size refer to Tire labeling later in this section 3 Original tire size The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory 8 34 Maintenance and do it yourself Checking tire pressure l Remove the valve stem cap from the tire Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side ways or air will escape If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage 3 Remove the gauge Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specifica tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label Add air to the tire
120. When closing the doors blinks in red and the front door warning beep the vehicle sounds for approximately 3 seconds The front door beep sounds for approximately 3 The Intelligent Key is left in Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle and close the door seconds and all doors unlock the vehicle The ignition knob is not in Turn the ignition knob to LOCK When opening the driver s i LOCK position or the me A warning chime sounds continuously i door chanical key is inserted into Remove the mechanical key from the ignition knob the ignition knob When stopping the engine The P position warning light in the instrument The selector lever is not in the Make sure that the selector lever is in the P Park position and panel blinks in red P Park position turn the ignition knob to LOCK When turning the ignition The warning chime sounds The ignition knob is not Turn the ignition knob to LOCK knob turned to LOCK When starting the engine The key warning light in the instrument panel The battery charge is low Replace the battery with a new one See Battery replacement in blinks in a the Maintenance and do it yourself section When turning the ignition A warning chime sounds A warning chime sounds continuously The ignition switch is not Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position switen A warning chime sounds continuously and the Gee ihe LACK position Intelligent Key lock warning light blinks When pushi
121. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi cal from the steering wheel or instru ment panel Always use the seat belts 1 38 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened The advanced air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us age then inflates the air bags Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor pressure sensor that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions This sensor is only used in this seat Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci dent See Front Passenger air bag and status light later in this section Keep hands on the outside of the steer ing wheel Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates Sit upright and well back A WARNING Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms Some examples of dangero
122. Your vehicle maintains the set speed To pass another vehicle depress the ac celerator pedal When you release the pedal the vehicle returns to the previously set speed The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills If this happens drive without the cruise control To cancel the preset speed use one of the following three methods Pushthe CANCEL button the SET indicator light in the instrument panel goes out Tap the brake pedal the SET indicator light goes out Turn the main switch off Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the instrument panel go out The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if you depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL RES or SET COAST switch The preset speed is deleted from memory the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH 13 km h below the set speed you move the shift selector lever to N Neu tral To reset at a faster cruising speed use one of the following three methods Depress the accelerator pedal When the vehicle attains the desired speed push and release the COAST SET switch Push and hold the ACCEL RES switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de sire release the switch Push and release the ACCEL RES switch Each time you do this the set speed in creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To reset at a slower cruising speed
123. ack to give it firm support Ashovel to dig the vehicle out of snowadrifts Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser voir tank DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE A WARNING e Wet ice 32 F 0 C and freezing rain very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded Whatever the condition drive with cau tion Accelerate and slow down with care If accelerating or downshifting too fast the drive wheels will lose even more traction Allow more stopping distance under these conditions Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement Allow greater following distances on slippery roads Watch for slippery spots glare ice These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas If a patch of ice is seen ahead brake before reach ing it Try not to brake while on the ice and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control on slip pery roads Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle ENGINE BLOCK HEATER if so equipped A WARNING Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2 pronged adapter You can be se riously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection Disconnect and prop
124. aded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this re duces the available cargo and lug gage load capacity of your vehicle Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle See Measurement of Weights later in this section Also check tires for proper inflation pres sures See the Tire and Loading Informa tion label LOADING TIPS The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR Doing so will exceed the GVWR AWARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seat backs In a sudden stop or colli sion unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could oc cur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause per sonal injury Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tir
125. ainers WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS A WARNING Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window Unattended chil dren could become involved in serious accidents The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position If the driver s or passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 sec onds power to the windows is canceled LICO407 Power door lock switch Window lock button Front passenger side Right rear passenger side Left rear passenger side Driver side automatic switch Driver s side power window switch a a co a The driver s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows To open a window push the switch and hold it down To close a window pull the switch and hold it up To stop the opening or closing function at any time simply release the switch Instruments and controls 2 37 Front passenger s power window switch The passenger s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger s window To open the window push the switch and hold it down 4 To close
126. aint to another seating position Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted the automatic locking mode child restraint mode is canceled WRS0256 Rear facing step 1 Rear facing Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats 1 30 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat A child restraint can only be installed in the rear center position of 5 passenger models Do not attempt to install a child restraint on the rear console of the 4 passenger model Position the child re straint on the seat Always follow the re straint manufacturer s instructions WRS0682 Rear facing step 2 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing LRSO669 LRSO670 Rear facing step 3 Rear facing step 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the extended At this time the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt is in the automatic locking mode child re straint mode It reverts to emergency lock
127. air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind This refrigerant does not harm the earth s ozone layer Special charging equipment and lubricant is re quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi tioner Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system See Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations in the Techni cal and consumer information section of this manual A NISSAN dealer is able to service your environ mentally friendly air conditioning system A WARNING The air conditioner system contains re frigerant under high pressure To avoid personal injury any air conditioner ser vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equipment AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and press the POWER VOLUME control knob to turn the radio on If you listen to the radio with the engine not running the key should be turned to the ACC position Radio reception is affected by station signal strength distance from radio transmitter build ings bridges mountains and other external influ ences Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences Using a cellular phone in or near the ve hicle may influence radio reception quality Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is
128. ake needs adjustment see a NISSAN dealer Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters seatback recliner etc to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the locks if so equipped hold securely in all latched positions Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system for example buckles anchors adjusters and retractors operate properly and smoothly Maintenance and do it yourself 8 3 and are installed securely Check the belt web bing for cuts fraying wear or damage Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer ing system such as excessive freeplay hard steering or strange noises Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically for example each time you check the engine oil or refuel Battery Check the fluid level in each cell It should be between the MAX and MIN lines Ve hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level
129. al is turned the DUAL indicator will come on To turn off the passenger side temperature control push the DUAL button Heating A C OFF The air conditioner does not activate When you need to heat only use this mode 1 Push the A C button A C OFF will be dis played and A C indicator will turn off 2 Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con trolled automatically Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature Otherwise the sys tem may not work properly Not recommended if windows fog up 4 20 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1 Push the HY defroster button on The in dicator light on the button will come on 2 Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows set the fan speed to maximum e As soon as possible after the windshield is clean push the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode When the front defroster button is pushed the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 23 F 5 C The air recirculate mode auto matically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging pe
130. alculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds When the fuel level is low the DTE display will change to NOTE Ifthe amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small the display just before the ignition switch is turned OFF may con tinue to be displayed When driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momentarily change the display Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 3 Average speed MPH or km h The Average Speed mode shows the average speed since the last reset To calculate the aver age speed driving distance is divided by driving time For approximately the first 30 seconds after a reset or reconnecting the battery cables the display will show Resetting average speed The average speed calculation can be reset to O Press the TRIP INFO button for more than ap proximately 2 seconds Fuel economy MPG or L 100 km The Fuel Economy mode shows the average fuel economy since the last reset For approximately the first 30 seconds and 1 3 mile 600 m after a reset or connecting the battery cables the display will show Resetting fuel economy The fuel economy calculation can be reset to O Press the TRIP INFO button for more than ap proximately 2 seconds 4 4 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems LHA
131. ally To proceed to the next step refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual TRIP 1 C OUTSIDE 6 Elapsed Time KR KKK KK Driving Distance PROT miles Average Speed kee MPH HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON When the TRIP button is pressed the following modes will display on the screen Warning message if any TRIP 1 TRIP 2 FUEL ECONOMY MAINTENANCE Audio or OFF TRIP 1 Each trip display tracks an independent trip and displays the following Elapsed Time Journey time since the last reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59 minutes Driving Distance Distance driven mile or km since the last reset Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 7 Average Speed Average speed driven MPH or km h since the last reset Resetting trip 1 and trip 2 Each trip screen can be reset to 0 Press the TRIP button to select the TRIP screen to be reset Select the Reset key on screen by press ing the ENTER button or Press the TRIP button for more than approxi mately 1 5 seconds Average Fuel Economy pH _Reset_ Distance to Empty 73 miles Fuel economy Press the TRIP button to display Average Fuel Economy and Distance To Empty Average fuel economy MPG or L 100 km The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based on fuel consumption since the last reset The display is updated every 30 seconds and 1 3 mile 500 m After
132. amp assembly Map light Rear personal lights Fog light Step light High mounted stop light Type A Trunk light High mounted stop light Type B License plate light Rear combination light Pe ae oe Aaa a a 8 28 Maintenance and do it yourself LDI0338 Front personal map lights Type A Use a cloth 4 to protect the housing Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A B C or D When replacing a bulb first remove the lens lamp and or cover Y Indicates bulb removal t Indicates bulb installation LDI0339 Front personal map lights Type B Use a cloth 4 to protect the housing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 29 WDI0340 LDI0341 Vanity mirror light Step light Use a cloth to protect the housing Use a cloth C to protect the housing WDI0342 Rear personal light Use a cloth 4 to protect the housing 8 30 Maintenance and do it yourself LDI0397 WD10343 Rear console box light if so equipped Trunk light Squeeze the tabs on the connector Pull out the bulb WDI0344 High mounted stop light if so equipped Maintenance and do it yourself 8 31 WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire see the In case of emergency section of this manual TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare When the low tire
133. and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications 5 P i Check if the disc is scratched or dirty oor sound qualit iai Bit rate may be too low It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3 disc or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music starts playing before the music starts playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not match the Music cuts off or skips iat i a specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data files Moves immediately to the When a non MP3 file has been given an extension of MP3 or mp3 or when play is prohibited by copyright protection there will be approximately 5 next song when playing seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order the desired order Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 27 9 POWER VOLUME control knob 10 A SCAN button 11 Station select 1 6 buttons 12 SEEK CHANNEL button 13 RADIO button CT 14 CD AUX button 15 PRESET A
134. anty Information Booklet Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage Have a dam aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility Windshield wiper blades Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis such as when per forming periodic maintenance cleaning the ve hicle etc Additional information on the following items with an is found later in this sec tion Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera tion If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur ther than normal the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop see a NISSAN dealer immediately Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied Continuously Variable Transmission CVT P Park position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P Park position without applying any brakes Parking brake Check the parking brake opera tion regularly The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied If the parking br
135. are used to meet the requirements One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor pressure sensor It is in the bottom of the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight It works together with seat belt sensors described later For example if a child is in the front passenger seat the advanced air bag sys tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations Also if a child restraint of the type specified in the regula tions is on the seat its weight and the child s weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF Occupant classification sensor opera tion can vary depending on the front passenger seat belt sensors The front passenger seat belt sensors are de signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the amount of tension on the seat belt such as when it is in the automatic locking mode child restraint mode Based on the weight on the seat detected by the occupant classification sensor and the belt tension detected on the seat belt the advanced air bag system determines whether the front pas senger air bag should be automatically turned OFF as required by the regulations Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out lined in this manual should not cause the passen ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF For small adults it may be turned OFF however if the oc
136. ation Push the lever up 4 to have one sweep opera tion of the wiper Pull the lever toward you 8 to operate the washer The wiper will also operate several times A WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield 2 20 Instruments and controls A CAUTION Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds Do not operate the washer if the reser voir tank is empty Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser voir tank Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen trate and water REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR if so equipped DEFROSTER SWITCH WIC0995 To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors if so equipped start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on Push the switch again to turn the defroster off The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 m
137. ave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners Trailer lights A CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system a commercially available power type module converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source The module converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits Using a module converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle s electrical sys tem See a reputable trailer dealer to ob tain the proper equipment and to have it installed Trailer lights should comply with federal and or local regulations For assistance in hooking up trailer lights contact a NISSAN dealer or repu table trailer dealer Trailer brakes If your trailer is equipped with a braking system make sure it conforms to federal and or local regulations and that it is properly installed A WARNING Never connect a trailer brake system di rectly to the vehicle brake system Pre towing tips Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and or unloaded trailer is hitched Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose up or nose down condition check for improper tongue load overload worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition Always
138. ay and possibly a fire Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement It has a built in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis sion control system An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers Always place the container on the ground when filling Do not use electronic devices when filling Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill ing it Use only approved portable fuel con tainers for flammable liquid A CAUTION If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body flush it away with water to avoid paint damage Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 21 Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap SERVICE properly may cause the ENGINE mal function indicator light MIL to illumi nate If the ENGINE light illuminates be cause the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle SERVICE The ENGINE light should turn
139. ay catalyst Do not race the engine while warming it up Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your
140. be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception lt lt gt gt TUNE FOLDER CAT Tuning To manually tune the radio TUNE FOLDER CAT button lt 4 turn the tuning knob to right or left press the or gt gt or To move quickly through the channels hold either the 44 or PP button down for more than 1 5 seconds id Gi SEEK TRACK tuning button Press the SEEK TRACK button M or Pl for less than 1 5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station To seek quickly through the channels press and hold the SEEK TRACK button for more than 1 5 seconds When the button is released the radio will seek to the next broadcasting station SCAN RPT tuning button Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1 5 seconds to stop at each broadcasting station AM FM or SAT if so equipped for 5 seconds Pressing the button again during this 5 second period will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN RPT button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station PRESET A B C Station memory opera tions 18 stations can be set for the FM AM and SAT satellite if so equipped radio to the A B and C preset button in any combinat
141. can reduce the effectiveness of the Active Head Restraint Active Head Restraints are designed to supplement other safety systems Al ways wear seat belts No system can prevent all injuries in any accident e Do not attach anything to the head re straint stalks Doing so could impair Active Head Restraint function The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz ing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear end collision The movement of the head restraint helps support the occu pant s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear end collisions After the collision the head restraints return to their original positions Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as described earlier in this section Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 9 SEAT BELTS Sit upright and well back PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buck
142. cargo being hauled or towed The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and come on steady Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav ing the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability reduced fuel economy and possible damage to the emission con trol system Slip indicator light if so equipped This indicator light will blink when the traction control system is limiting wheel spin Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator blinks on If this happens adjust your driving accordingly The slip indicator light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational If the light does not come on or does not go off have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer Ics Traction control system off EJ indicator light if so equipped This indicator light comes on when the traction control off switch is pushed to OFF This indi cates the traction control system is not operating Push the traction control off switch again or re start the engine and the system will operate nor mally See Traction control system TCS in the Starting and driving section of this manual The traction control light also comes on when you turn the igniti
143. caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as It is Closing the window will be immediately low ered SKYVIEW GLASS PANELED ROOF iO oM lt LIC0411 Open or close the SkyView roof shade by sliding it from side to side SUNROOF if so equipped AUTOMATIC SUNROOF The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position The automatic sunroof is operational for about 45 seconds even if the ignition key is turned to the ACC or OFF position If the driver s door or the front passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 sec onds power to the sunroof is canceled Sliding the sunroof To open the roof slide the switch to the OPEN position 1 When the roof is tilted up it will automatically tilt down and then open instruments and controls 2 39 To close the roof slide the switch to the CLOSE position 2 The position of the sliding roof lid can be chosen by the position of the sliding switch To fully open or close the roof completely move the switch to the open or closed position Tilting the sunroof To tilt the sunroof up push the tilt switch to the UP position When the roof is open it will automatically close and then tilt up To tilt the sunroof down push the tilt switch to the DOWN position Restarting the sunroof sliding switch The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected the electri cal supply in
144. ce be SS ee au S C M V S S certification label Cold weather driving Compact disc CD player 4 32 Compass display 2 40 lt 404 0524 8 84 2 6 Console box io 6 iG REESE ESS ww 2 34 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 5 9 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT IG 4a e dea 2 Hee E a eh em a 8 11 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 44 5 9 Control panel buttons Brightness contrast button 4 18 Back DUTON c e sa as a aaeei C4 a 4 7 Clock set oaaao a 4 5 Enter button aoaaa dae se was 4 6 Setting button a aao 4 5 4 11 Startup screen aoaaa ee ee 4 7 Tip DUHOM sso coded amp ee ek aes 4 3 4 7 With navigation system 4 6 Without navigation system 4 2 Controls Audio controls steering wheel 4 49 Coolant Capacities and recommended MICHIMDHC ANS s sa ce ae moe we ane ek i 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 Checking engine coolant level 8 7 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 9 Cornering light aaua aaa 2 26 Corrosion protection aooaa 7 6 Cruise control aoaaa ee ee ee 5 14 Cup holders 4 468668 8 eae amp ws 2 32 D Daytime running light system Canada only aa ww iw wm Wee ee eS 2 24 10 2 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWC ae Bae oS ee ee oe ee a 2 20 Dimensions and weights 9 8 Dimmer switch for instrument panel 2 2
145. cedures Example new vehicle purchases Upon sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes For additional information refer to Program ming HomeLink later in this section A WARNING e Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re verse features as required by federal safety standards These standards be came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1 1982 A ga rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features in creases the risk of serious injury or death During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close if the transmitter is within range Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door gate etc that you are programming Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver PROGRAMMING HOMELINK 1 To begin press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons to clear the memory until the indicator light blinks after 20 seconds Release both buttons Position the end of the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 3 Using both hands
146. cess this menu Pressing the AUDIO button will change the settings menu as follows Bass Mid Treble Fade Balance Speed Sense Volume Beep ON OFF Lan guage Audio or OFF Bass For additional information see Audio System later in this section Beep on off To turn off the beep press the TUNE button to select OFF This will disable the beep sound during menu selection except some caution beep sounds Language The language can be changed to ENGLISH or FRANCAIS by pressing the TUNE button Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 5 CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOOR WARNING The DOOR OPEN screen will be automatically displayed any time a door or the trunk is open If the door is open for longer than 10 seconds the screen will no longer display which door is open but the DOOR OPEN warning will remain until the door is closed 1 Xd brightness control button 6 DEST button P 4 18 7 ROUTE button 2 BACK previous button P 4 7 8 MAP button 3 Joystick and ENTER button P 4 7 9 GUIDE VOICE button 4 SETTING button P 4 11 10 amp zoom out button 5 TRIP button P 4 7 Q amp Q zoom in button 4 6 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems For Navigation system control buttons refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual When you use this system ma
147. ch as soot bird drop pings tree sap metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface when dust or mud builds up on the surface Whenever possible store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area When it is necessary to park outside park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean lukewarm never hot water 7 2 Appearance and care A CAUTION e Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent Some car washes espe cially brushless ones use some acid for cleaning The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components causing them to crack This could affect their appearance and also could cause them not to function properly Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used e Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap strong chemical deter gents gasoline or solvents Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun light or while the vehicle body is hot as the surface may become water spotted e Avoid using tight napped or rough cloths such as washing mitts Care must be taken when removing caked on dirt or other foreign sub stances so the paint surface is not scratched o
148. cle battery The other outlets are powered only when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position 2 30 Instruments and controls WIC1010 Front center console A CAUTION The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use The power outlets are not designed for use with a cigarette lighter Do not use with accessories that ex ceed a 12 volt 120W 10A power draw Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory Use power outlets with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner headlights or rear window defroster is on Before inserting or disconnecting a plug be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF Push the plug in as far as it will go If good contact is not made the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open When not in use be sure to close the cap Do not allow water to contact the outlet LIC0397 Rear center console if so equipped STORAGE MAP POCKETS j LIC0016 SEATBACK POCKETS The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver s and passenger s seats The pockets can be used to store maps instruments and controls 2 31 SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglasses holder push and release Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder A WARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident 2
149. crease increase the temperature before use Do not expose the CD to direct sun light CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty scratched or covered with finger prints may not work properly The following CDs may not work prop erly Copy control compact discs CCCD Recordable compact discs CD R Rewritable compact discs CD RW Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc tion 3 1 in 8 cm discs with an adapter CDs that are not round CDs with a paper label CDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play pre recorded CDs It has no capability to record or burn CDs If the CD cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed 4 24 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems CHECK DISC Confirm that the CD is inserted cor rectly the label side is facing up etc Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches PRESS EJECT This is an error due to excessive tem perature inside the player Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button After a short time reinsert the CD The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal UNPLAYABLE The file is unplayable in this audio sys tem only MP3 CD Compact Disc with MP3 Terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known co
150. ct to turn on or turn off the door lock and unlock modes used when a request switch is pushed Return all settings to default Select to change all VEHICLE ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS to their default settings SYSTEM SETTINGS Language Unit Beep Setting LHA0561 System settings Select the System Settings key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER button The SYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed Language unit The LANGUAGE UNIT screen will appear when selecting the Language Unit key and pressing the ENTER button Language English or French Unit US mile F MPG Metric km C L 100 km Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 15 You can select the language and unit using the joystick or pressing the ENTER button The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button CLOCK SETTINGS 4 gt Minutes GPS Time 06 25 Auto Adjust Daylight Saving Time Select Time Zone Pacific Clock Adjusting the time Select the Hours or Minutes key and move the joystick to the right or left to adjust the time The time will change step by step The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button 4 16 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems CLOCK SETTINGS 4 gt pen 15
151. cupant takes his her weight off the seat cush ion for example by not sitting upright by sitting on an edge of the seat or by otherwise being out of position this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF In addition if the occupant improperly uses the seat belt in the automatic locking mode child restraint mode this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag NISSAN recommends that pre teens and chil dren be properly restrained in a rear seat NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat If this is not possible the occupant classification sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the automatic locking mode child restraint mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF See Child restraints earlier in this section for proper use and installation If the front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash However heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag
152. d When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials check lubrication frequently Lights Clean the headlights on a regular basis Make sure that the headlights stop lights tail lights turn signal lights and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely Also check headlight aim Road wheel nuts When checking the tires make sure no wheel nuts are missing and check for any loose wheel nuts Tighten if necessary Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 7 500 miles 12 000 km Tires Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips If neces sary adjust the pressure in all tires including the spare to the pressure specified Check carefully for damage cuts or excessive wear Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS transmitter components Replace the grom met seal valve core and cap of the transmitter in vehicles equipped with TPMS at every tire re placement or when reaching the wear limit of the tires Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear there may be a need for wheel alignment If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds wheel balancing may be needed For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warr
153. d re straint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a dif ferent child restraint 1 27 WRS0680 Front facing step 3 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing LRSO667 Front facing step 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode child re straint mode It reverts to emergency lock ing mode when the seat belt is fully re tracted 1 28 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRSO668 Front facing step 5 5 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt WRS0681 Front facing step 6 6 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt WRS0698 Front facing step 7 If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point rear seat installation only See Top tether strap child restraint in this section Do not install child restraints that requir
154. d the jack lever and rod with both hands Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground Re move the wheel nuts and then remove the tire In case of emergency 6 5 Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual 1 Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be tween the wheel and hub 2 Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight 3 With the wheel nut wrench tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight 6 6 Incase of emergency 4 Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground Then with the wheel nut wrench tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated E Lower the vehicle completely A WARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off This could cause an accident e Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts This could cause the nuts to become loose Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve hicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 80 ft lb 108 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tig
155. d unnecessary stopping and braking Maintain a safe distance behind other ve hicles Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions On level roads shift into high gear as soon as possible Avoid unnecessary engine idling Keep your engine tuned up Follow the recommended periodic mainte nance schedule Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres sure Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Keep the wheels in correct alignment Im proper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy Use the air conditioner only when necessary 5 16 Starting and driving When cruising at highway speeds it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag Use the recommended viscosity engine oil See Engine oil and oil filter recommenda tion in Technical and consumer informa tion later in this manual PARKING PARKING ON HILLS A WARNING e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P Park Fail ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and re sult in an accident Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depress
156. ded with the system on Compact disc CD changer operation Type B only Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start play ing To insert the disc first press the but ton If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the POWER button will start the compact disc Do not use 3 1 in 8 cm diameter compact discs in the CD changer LOAD button To insert a CD in the CD changer press the load button for less than 1 5 seconds Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select button 1 6 then insert the CD To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer press the load button for more than 1 5 seconds The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 33 CD AUX button When the CD AUX button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the CD AUX button is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play lt gt TUNE Rewind and Fast
157. dlights on 2 26 Instruments and controls HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH g LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi tions All turn signal lights flash AWARNING If stopping for an emergency be sure to move the vehicle well off the road Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic Turn signals do not work when the haz ard warning flasher lights are on The flashers will operate with the ignition switch in any position Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving HORN To sound the horn push the center pad area of the steering wheel A WARNING Do not disassemble the horn Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system Tam pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury HEATED SEATS if so equipped The front and rear seats are warmed by built in heaters if so equipped The switches are lo cated on the center consoles 1 2 Start the engine Push the LO or HI position of the switch as desired The indicator light in the switch will illuminate The heater is controlled by a thermostat automatically turning the heater on and off The indicator light will remai
158. e If desired the horn beep feature can be deacti vated using the Intelligent Key NOTE If you change the horn beep and lamp flash feature with the keyfob the display screen if so equipped will not show the current mode and cannot be used to change the mode Use the keyfob to return to the pre vious mode and re enable the display screen control To deactivate Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash three times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated To activate Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds once more The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si lence the horn if the alarm is triggered P position selecting warning light 2 Intelligent Key system warning light WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS The Intelligent Key system is equipped with a function that is designed to minimize improper operations and to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen The warning buzzer sounds and the warning light illuminates when improper opera tions are detected Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 15 CAUTION When the buzzer sounds and the warning light illuminates be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from movin
159. e but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer brak ing distances This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the _ vehicle s warranty MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle When the vehicle is loaded drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads Individual axle loads should not ex ceed either of the gross axle weight rat ings GAWR The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label If weight ratings are exceeded move or re move items to bring all weights below the ratings Technical and consumer information 9 15 TOWING A TRAILER A WARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling braking and perfor mance and may lead to accidents A CAUTION Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged For the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Your new vehicle was designed to b
160. e may pull to one side during braking To dry the brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes Do this until the brakes return to normal Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly Parking brake break in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and or drum rotors are replaced in order to assure the best brake performance This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS A WARNING The Anti lock Braking System ABS is a sophisticated device but it cannot pre vent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces Remem ber that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS Stopping dis tances may also be longer on rough gravel or snow covered roads or if you are using tire chains Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you Ultimately the driver is respon sible for safety Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness When replacing tires install the specified size of tires on all four wheels When installing a spare tire make sure that it is the proper size a
161. e steering wheel to approximately 86 F 30 C then turn off automatically 2 28 Instruments and controls Push the switch again to turn the heated steering off manually The indicator light will go off NOTE If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68 F 20 C when the switch is turned on the system will not heat the steering wheel This is not a malfunction TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM TCS OFF SWITCH if so equipped LICO451 The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con trol System TCS on for most driving conditions If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the TCS reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the TCS off To turn off the TCS push the TCS OFF switch The indicator will come on Push the TCS OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn ON the system See Traction control system TCS in the Starting and driv ing section VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC OFF SWITCH if so equipped The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system on for most driv ing conditions If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is
162. e AUDIO button is not pressed after 8 seconds the display will refresh with the last selected display mode setting Channel number mode displays the channel number of the selected satellite radio sta tion Channel name mode displays the channel name of the selected satellite radio station Name mode displays the name of the artist host or weather condition of the selected satellite radio station Title mode displays the song title show name or temperature of the selected satel lite radio station FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM SAT band select Pressing the FM AM or SAT radio select button will change the band to either FM AM or SAT satellite if so equipped radio stations When the FM AM or SAT radio select button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the POWER VOLUME control knob is pressed on No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM or SIRIUS satellite radio service subscription is active Sat ellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam 4 38 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems If a compact disc is playing when the FM AM or SAT radio select button is pushed the compact disc will automatically
163. e driving checks and adjustments 3 25 O LPD0237 OUTSIDE MIRRORS The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Move the small switch 4 to select the right or left mirror Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch 3 26 Pre driving checks and adjustments AWARNING e Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear Be careful when moving to the right Using only this mirror could cause an accident Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects e Do not adjust the mirrors while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Automatic anti glare outside mirrors if so equipped The outside mirrors will automatically dim during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the headlights of trailing vehicles The automatic anti glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position The automatic anti glare feature will be on when starting the vehicle The indicator light on the automatic anti glare rearview mirror will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature is on To turn off the automatic anti glare feature press the O button on rearview mirrors without compass the compass button on rearview mirrors with The indicator light will turn off To turn on the automatic
164. e of al cohol or drugs e ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions e ALWAYS give your full attention to driv ing and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you e ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro priate child restraint systems Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat e ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle e ALWAYS review this Owner s Manual for important safety information MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified Modification could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations In addition damage or per formance problems resulting from modi fications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model Therefore you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle All information specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with out obligation IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual They are used in the following ways A WARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause d
165. e of wheels Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter Spare tire TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire if so equipped Observe the following precautions if the TEM PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used Otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident AWARNING The spare tire should be used for emer gency use only It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first oppor tunity to avoid possible tire or differen tial damage Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi 420 kPa 4 2 bar With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH 80 km h When driving on roads covered with snow or ice the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels drive wheels
166. e on at any time without warning even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running To avoid injury always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan If you must work with the engine run ning keep your hands clothing hair and tools away from moving fans belts and any other moving parts It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry such as rings watches etc before working on your vehicle Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle If you must run the engine in an en closed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack If it is neces sary to work under the vehicle support it with safety stands Keep smoking materials flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery On gasoline engine models with the multiport fuel injection MFI system the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is Off A CAUTION Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant Improperly disposed engine oil engine coolant and or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment Al ways conform to local regulations for disp
167. e rocking motion Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R Reverse and D Drive Do not spin the tires above 35 mph 55 km h If the vehicle can not be freed after a few tries contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior secre cir erage dasa ep saws a 7 2 Cleaning IMeOl c ayancaas casewiesaoeerade seeds 7 4 Eea coacesetectes Cassese neceeee ETET 2 FOOF MAS eene erii eee ceeen ne eee w ae cae ok 7 5 WANG cavern astas EENE ES E sees 7 2 Se O E E E TEET 7 5 REMOVING SPOlSsrssirirrresiorrga Seeeenew ered 7 3 ComnoSion PPOl6ClON sca ccneccrcccerntiinaweonoaues 7 6 WNGCIDOOY cis iiccrencrsedeeeoks pede ne EES ses 7 3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle ase aa vse ete ta on eneatas EEE E 7 3 COMOSION repress ees uire EAE SOE EEES 7 6 Aluminum alloy WheelS 00 e eee eee eee eee 7 3 Environmental factors influence the rate of CRIGIIG DAIS j scu0es ou hbeanennes eA 7 4 OOMOSION sens ecegee EA sects nses eeaeaues 7 6 Tire dressi S pewesee bes ceseeneeeees ku ecresuss 7 4 To protect your vehicle from corrosion 7 6 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve hicle it is important to take proper care of it To protect the paint surfaces please wash your vehicle as soon as you can after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain after driving on coastal roads when contaminants su
168. e the use of a top tether strap to seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 10 Before placing the child in the child restraint hold the child restraint near the seat belt path and use force to push the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place It should not move more than 1 in 25 mm If it does move more than 1 in 25 mm pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint If you are unable to properly secure the restraint move the restraint to another seating position and try again or try a differ ent child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor the retractor is in the automatic locking mode Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 8 1 29 11 LRS0316 Front facing step 11 If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat turn the ignition switch to the ON position The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate If this light is not illuminated see Front passenger air bag and status light in this section Move the child restr
169. e used pri marily to carry passengers and cargo Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle s engine drive train steering brak ing and other systems A NISSAN Towing Guide U S only is available on the website at www nissanusa com This guide includes information on trailer towing ca pability and the special equipment required for proper towing 9 16 Technical and consumer information MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load Specification chart found later in this sec tion The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight When towing a trailer load of 1 000 Ibs 454 kg or more trailers with a brake system must be used The Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle including passengers and cargo plus the total trailer load Towing loads greater than these or using Improper towing equipment could ad versely affect vehicle handling braking and per formance The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads but also the places you plan to tow Tow weights appro priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations for example on slippery boat ramps Temperature conditions also can affect towing For example towing a heavy trailer in high outside
170. ean engine oil Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt then tighten an additional 2 3 turn Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter Correct as required Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level Add engine oil if necessary CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT FLUID A WARNING Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 Do not mix with other fluids e Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 will damage the CVT which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty When checking or replacement is required we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing The specified CVT fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compart ment POWER STEERING FLUID The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122 176 F 50 80 C or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera tures of 32 86 F 0 30 C If the fluid is below the MIN line add Genuine NISSAN PSF Remove the cap and fill through the opening A CAUTION e DO NOT OVERFILL e Recommended fluid is NISSAN PSF or equivalent Genuine BRAKE FLUID For further brake fluid specification information refer to Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consum
171. eath or serious personal injury To avoid or reduce the risk the procedures must be followed precisely A CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder ate personal injury or damage to your ve hicle To avoid or reduce the risk the pro cedures must be followed carefully If you see this symbol it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen amp If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra tion it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle 53 Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action t Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING A WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de fects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts such as lithium batter ies may contain perchlorate material The following advisory is provided Perchlor ate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste
172. ect to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation This transmitter has been tested and com plies with FCC and DOC MDC rules Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment DOC ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I D CV2V67690 Instruments and controls 2 47 MEMO 2 48 Instruments and controls 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments eS EEE TA eee heeeayoees Geet eee seed eases nese 3 2 Intelligent KeyS 2 52 enees Sense sentereer sce seeeeres 3 2 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys 3 3 Bie ai sada caetee sas Peo A ed aus ee eee E E 3 4 LOCKING with K6Y cia cez cence gteekc cuseeedeceue ee 3 4 Locking with inside lock knob 05 3 5 Locking with power door lock switch 3 5 Child safety rear door lock 0 0 cee e eens 3 6 intelligent Key system lt ss lt ie stace eke wel eeneewewiss 3 7 Operating TANJE erais xed 84 ke rag ene nE 3 8 Door locks unlocks precaution 05 3 9 Intelligent Key operation 220055 3 9 How to use the remote keyless entry MUNCUCH ac oe se ee kdeenece cages E T TE 3 12 Warning lights and audible reminders 3 15 Waming SIQNAIS s acevexcae 4 ce eeseeeaee eeuaes 3
173. ecurity system NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors or trunk lid when the system is armed It is not however a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations Al ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period Never leave your keys in the ignition and always lock the vehicle when unattended Be aware of your surroundings and park in secure well lit areas whenever possible Many devices offering additional protection such as component locks identification markers and tracking systems are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment Check with your insurance company to see If you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features How to arm the vehicle security system 1 Close all windows The system can be armed even if the windows are open 2 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion and remove the key 3 Close the trunk lid and all doors Lock all doors The doors can be locked with the power door lock switch if the door is opened locked and then closed the key mechanical any request s
174. ed the system announces No paired phones to list The system then ends the VR session Select phone Use the Select Phone command to select a phone of lesser priority when two or more phones paired with Bluetooth Hands Free Phone Sys tem are in the vehicle at the same time The system asks you to name the phone and confirm the selection Once the selection is confirmed the selected phone remains active until the ignition switch is turned OFF or you select a new phone Change priority Use the Change Priority command to change the priority level of the active phone The priority level determines which phone is ac tive when more than one paired Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle The system states the priority level of the active phone and asks for a new priority level 1 2 3 4 5 If the new priority level is already being used for another phone the two phones will swap priority levels For example if the current priority levels are Priority Level 1 Phone A Priority Level 2 Phone B Priority Level 3 Phone C and you change the priority level of Phone C to Level 1 then Priority Level 1 Phone C Priority Level 2 Phone B Priority Level 3 Phone A Delete phone Use the Delete Phone command to delete a specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System The system announces the names of the phones already paired with the system and the
175. ed inside the trunk 3 20 Pre driving checks and adjustments To open the trunk from the inside pull the illumi nated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light The handle is located inside the trunk compart ment on the interior of the trunk lid FUEL FILLER DOOR OPENER OPERATION The fuel filler door release is located on the driv er s door To open the fuel filler door push the release To lock close the fuel filler door se curely FUEL FILLER CAP The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove To tighten turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling A WARNING Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi tions You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling Fuel may be under pressure Turn the cap a third of a turn and wait for any hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possibly causing personal injury Then remove the cap Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow resulting in fuel spr
176. ed the ready condi tion for an Inspection Maintenance I M test of the emission control system The vehicle is set to the ready condition when tt is driven through certain driving patterns Usually the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle If a powertrain system Component is repaired or the battery is disconnected the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition Before taking the I M test check the vehicle s inspection maintenance test readiness condi tion Turn the ignition switch ON without starting the engine If the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds the I M test condition is not ready If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds the I M test condition is ready If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a not ready con dition drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you Technical and consumer information 9 25 A WARNING Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic con ditions and obey all traffic laws 1 Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C Al low the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H normal oper ating temperature 2 Accelerate the vehicle to
177. educe the risk of injury to out of position occupants However all of the infor mation cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed The supplemental side air bags and curtain side impact air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted They may not inflate in certain side collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag and curtain side impact air bag operation When the supplemental side air bag and curtain side impact air bag inflate a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Supplemental side air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants Curtain side impact air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries How ever an inflating side air bag and curtain side impact air bag may cause abrasions or ot
178. eering wheel moves back into position when the driver s door is closed and the ignition switch is pushed For more information see Automatic drive posi tioner later in this section Telescopic operation Push the switch to adjust the steering wheel forward or backward 2 to the desired position MANUAL OPERATION Tilt operation Pull the lock lever forward and adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position Push the lock lever back to lock the steering wheel in place Telescopic operation Push the lock lever down and adjust the steering wheel forward or backward 4 to the desired position Pull the lock lever up firmly to lock the steering wheel in place Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 23 SUN VISORS 3 24 Pre driving checks and adjustments To block glare from the front swing down the main sun visor 2 To block glare from the side remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side Slide the extension sun visor in or out as needed CAUTION Do not store the sun visor before return ing the extension to its original position Do not pull the extension sun visor forc edly downward VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover The vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is open MIRRORS WPD0332 Without compass AUTOMATIC AN
179. efer to Tire pressure information later in this section ENGINE OIL Oon WTSI G Driving Distance 74 O miles 3 750 7 500 omies gt Display Maintenance Notification T Maintenance Schedule Changing the maintenance interval Select the Engine Oil or Tire Rotation key using the joystick and press the ENTER button to display the screen to change the maintenance interval Select the Maintenance Schedule key using the joystick and move the joystick to right or left to set the maintenance interval TIRE ROTATION l Dring Distans Driving Distance O miles 3 750 7 500 Comes gt Maintenance Schedule Resetting the maintenance interval The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION mainte nance intervals can be reset to O miles kilome ters Select the Reset key using the joystick and press the ENTER button Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 9 MAINTENANCE NOTICE Maintenance of the Following Item is Due Engine Oil Displaying the maintenance notice re minder Select the Display Maintenance Notification key and press the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION will be automatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met The vehicle is driven the set distance and t
180. eing a stuck vehicle Front or Rear A WARNING e Stand clear of a stuck vehicle e Do not spin your tires at high speed This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged 6 12 Incase of emergency A CAUTION Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle or the towing hooks if so equipped Otherwise the vehicle body will be damaged Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free a vehicle stuck in sand snow mud etc Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle tie downs or recovery hooks Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle Never pull the vehicle at an angle Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the sus pension steering brake or cooling systems Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use the following procedure 1 Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System if so equipped 2 Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions 3 4 Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back ward Shift back and forth between R Reverse and D Drive Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain th
181. em TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Con tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS SETTINGS pT Display Vehicle Electronic Systems System Settings Guidance Voice Guidance Volume C a es HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed the SET TINGS screen will appear on the display You can select and or adjust several functions features and modes that are available for your vehicle Move the joystick and press the ENTER button to select each item to be set DISPLAY SETTINGS Display settings Select the Display key and press the ENTER button The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will ap pear Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 11 Brightness O Contrast o Map Background Dark O Bright Brightness contrast map background Select the Brightness Contrast Map Back ground key to adjust the brightness and contrast of the map background Use the joystick to adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the con trast to lower or higher Use the joystick to select the Map Background key Press the ENTER button or move the joystick right or left to choose a Dark
182. enger seat Supplemental front air bags in flate with great force A rear facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental front air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child 1 26 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system e NISSAN recommends that child re straints be installed in the rear seat However if you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front pas senger seat move the passenger seat to the rearmost position Also be sure the front passenger air bag status light is illuminated to indicate the passenger air bag is OFF See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this sec tion for details The three point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the retractor s locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The re straint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision Also it can change the operation of the front pas senger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passen ger seat The 4 passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats Never use the rear console as a
183. er information section of this manual A WARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con tainer Old inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehi cle s stopping ability Be sure to clean the filler cap before removing A CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur faces This will damage the paint If fluid is spilled immediately wash the surface with water Maintenance and do it yourself 8 11 FN pes fa BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line If fluid must be added frequently the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer 8 12 Maintenance and do it yourself WINDOW WASHER FLUID WINDOW WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically Add window washer fluid when the low window washer fluid warning light comes on if so equipped To fill the window washer fluid reservoir lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning In the winter season add a windshield washer antifreeze Follow the manufacturer s in structions for the mixture ratio Refill the reservoir more fre
184. er retractor 11 Side satellite sensor 12 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System front seats This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad vanced air bag system for the driver and front passenger seats This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U S regu lations It is also permitted in Canada However all of the information cautions and warn ings in this manual still apply and must be followed The driver supplemental front air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel The passenger supplemental front air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box The supplemen tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions although they may in flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper supplemental front air bag system operation The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dual stage inflators It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor the diagnosis sensor unit seat belt buckle sensors occupant classification sensor pressure sensor and passenger seat belt tension sensor Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver For the front passenger it additionally monitors the weight of an
185. erly store the en gine block heater cord before starting the engine Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury e Use a heavy duty 3 wire 3 pronged ex tension cord rated for at least 10 A Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 VAC outlet Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury Engine block heaters are available through NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature starting The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20 F 7 C or lower To use the engine block heater i 2 Turn the engine off Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3 wire 3 pronged extension cord Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 volt AC VAC outlet The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 4 hours depending on outside temperatures to properly warm the engine coolant Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on Before starting the engine unplug and prop erly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts Starting and driving 5 25 MEMO 5 26 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency Pla Cee eaecosea sateen etnee seen E E S 6 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring Syste
186. es neh 4 18 VENUIGLOFS a roerne resien ENa EEE A A 4 18 Heater and air conditioner automatic 4 19 Automatic operation 00 e eee eee 4 20 Manual operation ei5cen euseeneeuenneseuence 4 20 Operating IDS 2tneqetanensyereandeawekvacreess 4 21 Servicing air conditioner s ees 4 22 Audio System lt 0 as2deten dee ok baceeedese eedeuee nee 4 292 FM radio reception occscccceaceucvoereuveceusuc AM radio reception icctnnn cee dere geesneeevema Satellite radio reception if so equipped Audio operation precautionS 0e eee FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player Type A CD changer Type B FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD CHANGE cat aseeacea ce neon es nares eu enone s neces CD care and cleaning 2 eeeeee eee Steering wheel switch for audio control AE ou secak Sacmaeaseeend oote E ENA Car phone or CB radi0 iccncasveney oar accae anne Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System if so equipped s20ncxend scenes eakaeedecek snnecaed Using the system casccdcegdevereteestearescaded Control Dutos ss sercssreisrisrrsrk kuri nridri Gelling Slated oisnvteneaseeayetnpereaneensasy List of voice COMMANGS 22 ccscivarvedeecuenienes Speaker adaptation SA mode 0005 Troubleshooting guide 0e eee eee eee CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS WITH MONOCHROME SCREEN A WARNING Do not disassemble or modify this sys tem If you do it may
187. es nrima ea e dees 3 20 Gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Fuel gauge gn eee amp lt 6 bdo eSB 2 5 Odometer amp 2 4 e et 2 6 oa eee ee 2 4 Speedometer 2006 2 3 Tachometer 025008 2 4 Trip odometer s sa aa sa corras 2 4 General maintenance 8 2 GIOVE BOX a e s e eee ede eee ee ef 2 34 Glove box lock 22000 2 34 Grocery hooks 2 36 H Hands free phone system Bluetooth 4 43 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 26 Head restraints 00002 1 8 Active Head Restraint 1 9 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 21 Headlight control switch 2 22 Headlights 4 04 9 a 9 8 2 ee we Seed 8 25 Heated seats 6G 4s wae we eed eas 2 27 Heated steering wheel 2 28 Heater Heater operation 4 20 HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 44 Hood release noaoae we ae ws 3 18 FIOM a ee om eee ee Gee a ay a oe F 2 27 l IGNITION switch oaoa eo ewe we 5 6 Immobilizer system 2 18 3 3 5 7 Important vehicle information label 9 10 In cabin microfilter 8 16 Increasing fuel economy 5 16 Indicator lights and audible reminders See warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 cee ee ee ee 9 9 Instrument brightness control 2 25 Instrument panel 0 6 2 2 Instrument panel dimmer switch
188. essure sensor No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system This may affect the supplemental front air bag system Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Work on and around the supplemental front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electri cal equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The Supplemental Re straint System SRS wiring should not be modified or disconnected Unautho rized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system e A cracked windshield should be re placed immediately by a qualified re pair facility A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and Orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri ate sections in this Owner s Manual nem Zen ie Supplemental side impact air bag and curtain side impact air bags system The supplemental side impact air bags are lo cated in the outside of the seatback of the front seats The supplemental curtain side impact air bags are located in the side roof rails These systems are designed to meet voluntary guide lines to help r
189. estraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit See Head restraint adjustment earlier in this section If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to install the head restraint when the booster seat is removed If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit try another seating position or a different booster seat 1 36 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child s hips Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions for adjusting the belt routing Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top middle portion of the child s shoulder Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s instructions for adjusting the belt routing Follow the warnings cautions and instruc tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in the Three point seat belt with retractor earlier in this section LRSO0454 Front passenger position 7 lf the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat turn the ignition switch to the ON position The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used See Front passenger air ba
190. f done incorrectly jump starting can lead to a battery explosion resulting in severe injury or death It could also damage your vehicle Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or painted surfaces Battery fluid is a cor rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns If the fluid should come into contact with anything imme diately flush the contacted area with water Keep battery out of the reach of children The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle Whenever working on or near a battery always wear suitable eye protectors for example goggles or industrial safety spectacles and remove rings metal bands or any other jewelry Do not lean over the battery when jump starting Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery It could explode and cause se rious injury Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan It could come on at any time Keep hands and other objects away from it In case of emergency 6 7 A WARNING Always follow the instructions below Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury 1 6 8 If the booster battery is in another vehicle position the two vehicles to bring their bat teries
191. fectiveness Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts The 4 passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats If the seat belt warning light glows con tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened it may indicate a mal function in the system Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Once the pre tensioner seat belt has activated it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor See your NISSAN dealer Removal and installation of the pre tensioner seat belt system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer 1 12 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system All seat belt assemblies including re tractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN recom mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted All child restraints and attaching hard ware should be inspected after any col lision Always follow the restraint manufacturer s inspection instructions and replacement recommendatio
192. for a maximum of 30 seconds Driver s door is opened Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds after driver s door is closed Ignition key is removed from key cylinder Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds The lights will go off when the ignition key is in the ON position or the driver s door is closed and locked The lights will also go off after 30 minutes when doors are open When the switch is in the OFF position the interior light does not illuminate regard less of door position NOTE The footwell and doorstep lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light switch position These lights will turn off automatically after 30 minutes while doors are open to prevent the battery from be coming discharged A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery PERSONAL LIGHTS FRONT To turn the map lights on press the switches To turn them off press the switches again A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery Console light The console light will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control Instruments and control
193. four one Correction setup change ring tone dial seven four oh one eight setup main menu Delete dial nine seven two six six memo pad delete call seven six three oh one go back call five six two eight zero dial six six four three seven TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered try the following solutions Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number 1 until the problem is resolved Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 55 1 Ensure that the command is valid See List of voice commands earlier in this section 2 Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone 3 Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle 4 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defroster on NOTE If it is too System fails to interpret the command correctly met noisy to use the phone it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized 5 If more than one command was said at a time try saying the commands separately 6 If the system consistently fails to recognize commands the voice training procedure should be carried out to im prove the recognition response for the speaker See Speaker adaptation SA mode earlier in this section
194. fuel ECONOMY 2 cece eee eens 5 16 Parking parking on hills 0 0 eee e eee eee 5 17 Power SicCtINnG san scneteseecteaeeeerse cent see ceed 5 18 Brake SV Sle lt teeranceouettney sat irite breer iaa 5 18 Brake precautions siceccentsetieweus teteandw ed 5 18 Anti lock Braking System ABS 05 5 19 Traction control system TCS if so equipped 5 20 Vehicle dynamic control VDC system iSO equipped ace aeuaeeaceneeerne see vereaasea ns 5 21 Rear sonar system if so equipped 5 5 22 Cold weather driving 00 eee cece eee eee 5 23 Freeing a frozen door lock 0 cee eee 5 23 PHC Zee bat ate dense EE E eee eee 5 23 DOUlehy OEE EE E E TE TEE E TE 5 23 Draining of coolant water ssssss eee eee 5 24 Tire GQUIDMENT ccc vee eetace yes ee eees sree cacxed 5 24 Special winter equipment 2 0000e 5 24 Driving ON SHOW OTF ICS 2 2cr2ccsecedevedveeskunes 5 24 Engine block heater if so equipped 5 25 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING A WARNING e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals
195. g aid driver s side only This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your ve hicle model The driver s side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the footwell Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them See Seat belt maintenance in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemen tal restraint system section of this manual A WARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor NEVER use bleach dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing Appearance and care 7 5 CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections cavities and other areas Damage to paint and other protective coat ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand dirt and water on the ve hicle body underside can accelerate corrosio
196. g and status light later in this section SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System SRS sec tion contains important information concerning the driver and passenger supplemental front air bags NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System supplemental side air bags curtain side impact air bags and pre tensioner seat belts Supplemental front impact air bag system The NISSAN advanced air bag system can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions Supplemental side impact air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions The front seat side impact supplemental side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted Supplemental curtain side impact air bag system This system can help cushion the im pact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact collisions The curtain side impact air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system These supplemental restraint systems are de signed to supplement the crash protection pro vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them Seat belts shou
197. g unex pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning light comes on in the instrument panel When a chime or beep sounds or the warning light comes on be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key Audible reminder and warning when locking the doors When the chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle check for the following The ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position The Intelligent Key is not left inside the ve hicle The selector lever is in the P position 3 16 Pre driving checks and adjustments Audible reminder and warning when the engine stops When the P position selecting warning light Pe in the instrument panel blinks in red Make sure the selector lever is in the P position When the chime sounds intermittently Make sure the selector lever is in the P position and the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position If the chime sounds continuously when the driv er s door is opened check the following The selector lever is in the P position and the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi tion The mechanical key is not inserted into the ignition switch The warning chime may stop when one of the following is performed Returning the ignition switch to the LOCK position Removing the mechanical
198. ght of 2 000 Ib 909 kg You may add Class trailer hitch equipment that has a 2 000 Ib 909 kg maximum weight rating to the vehicle but your vehicle is only capable of 9 20 Technical and consumer information towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the Towing Load Specification Chart earlier in this section A CAUTION Do not use axle mounted hitches The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact absorbing bumper Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys tem brake system etc to install a trailer hitch To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear where practical remove the receiver when not in use e After the hitch is removed seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes water or dust from entering the passenger compartment Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted Tire pressures When towing a trailer inflate the ve hicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Trailer tire condition size load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer s specifications Safety chains Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch not to the vehicle bumper or axle Be sure to le
199. gine by pushing CAUTION CVT models cannot be push started or tow started Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS If your vehicle is overheating indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading or if you feel a lack of engine power detect abnormal noise etc take the following steps A WARNING Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire To avoid the danger of being scalded never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot When the radiator cap is removed pressurized hot water will spurt out possibly causing serious injury Do not open the hood if steam is com ing out 1 Move the vehicle safely off the road apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park Do not stop the engine 2 Turn off the air conditioner Open all the windows move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed 3 Get out of the vehicle Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood If steam or cool ant is escaping turn off the engine Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen 4 Open the engine hood AWARNING If steam or water is coming from the en gine stand clear to prevent getting burned 5 Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness Also check if
200. gs 9 seconds Compass enters calibration mode For information about the automatic anti glare feature refer to Automatic anti glare rearview mirror in the Pre driving checks and adjust ments section 5 seconds Push the button for about 1 second when the ignition switch is in the ON position to toggle the compass display on or off The display will indicate the direction of the vehicle s heading N North E East S South W West If the display reads C calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH 8 km h You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route The com pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles ZONE VARIATION CHANGE PROCEDURE The difference between magnetic north and geo graphical north is known as variance In some areas this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens NS A 2 1 Press and hold the N button for about 5 14 seconds The current zone number will ap lt N YX TE ies pear in the display Release the button 2 Find your current location on the zone map 13 y p HH ae Se Refer to the illustration AA A at 12 3 Press the button repeatedly to toggle through the zone numbers until the desired number appears in the dis
201. gularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un derbody and suspension Before the winter pe riod and again in the spring the underseal must be checked and if necessary retreated GLASS When cleaning the rear window it may be easier to clean if the high mounted stop light is removed first Be careful when removing the high mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high mounted stop light wires To remove the high mounted stop light Push toward rear of vehicle 2 Lift to remove The high mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film A CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows do not use sharp edged tools abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners They could damage the electri cal conductors radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp ened in a mild soap solution especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used If not removed road salt can discolor the wheels A CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels D
202. h no special play pattern enabled SCAN button While listening to a CD press the A SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD playing Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the CD remains on that track MP3 SCAN mode While listening to an MP3 CD press the A SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each file in the current folder The scan will con tinue on to the next folder and files if there is more than one folder on the MP3 CD Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the MP3 CD remains in that folder CD AUX Auxiliary button The AUX jack is located on the CD player The AUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana log audio input such as from a portable cassette tape CD player MP3 player or laptop computers Press the CD AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX Jack a CD EJECT urrent Selected disc Press the amp button then press the slot number 1 6 for the desired disc The compact disc will be ejected If no slot num ber 1 6 is pressed the current loaded disc will be ejected Also if the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds the disc will reload All discs Press and hold the amp button for more than 1 5 seconds The compact discs will be ejected one by one If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds or the amp button
203. h CD text as follows Track number and Track time gt Album title Song title Track number displays the track number se lected on the disc Track time displays the amount of time the track has played Album title displays the title of the CD being played Song title displays the title of the selected CD track MP3 display mode Type B only To change the text displayed when listening to a CD with MP8s and IDS tags press the CLOCK DISP button The CLOCK DISP button will scroll through the CD text as follows Disc number Track number and Folder number gt Folder title Album title Artist name gt Song title Disc number displays the number of the current disc playing Track number displays the number of the track playing on the selected disc Folder number displays the number of the current folder on the MP3 CD Folder title displays the title of the folder Album title displays the title of the album of the song playing Artist name displays the name of the artist of the song playing Song title displays the title of the song play ing Display satellite radio display mode if so equipped To change the text displayed when listening to satellite radio if so equipped press the CLOCK DISP button The CLOCK DISP button will scroll through the broadcast information as follows Channel number gt Category name lt Channel name gt Artist name
204. he ignition key is turned OFF The ignition key is turned ON the next time the vehicle will be driven To return to the previous display after the MAIN TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed press the BACK button The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met Reset key is selected Display Maintenance Notification is set to OFF The maintenance interval is set again 4 10 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems TIRE PRESSURE Tire pressure information To display tire pressure information press the TRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCE screen is displayed Select the Tire Pressure key using the joystick and press the ENTER but ton Pressure indication in psi on the screen indi cates that the pressure is being measured After a few driving trips the pressure for each tire will be displayed randomly The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s operation and the outside temperature In case of low tire pressure a message is dis played on the screen LOW PRESSURE Check All Tires A WARNING When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the Tire Pressure Monitoring Syst
205. he LOAD button If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the POWER VOLUME control knob will start the compact disc LOAD button To insert a CD in the CD changer press the LOAD button for less than 1 5 seconds Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select button 1 6 then insert the CD To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer press the LOAD button for more than 1 5 seconds The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer CD button When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the CD button is pressed with the com pact disc loaded with the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 39 lt lt gt gt TUNE FOLDER CAT button CD While playing a CD press the lt 4 or PP button the CD plays at an in creased speed while rewinding or fast for warding through the current track being played When the button is released the CD returns to normal play speed MP3 CD While playing an MP8 press the TUNE FOLDER CAT button 44 or D gt to scan backward or forward through avail able folders
206. he doors locked while driving Along with the use of seat belts this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open ing the doors and will help keep out intruders e Before opening any door always look for and avoid oncoming traffic Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents Driver s side LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time Turning the key toward the front C of the vehicle locks all doors Turning the key one time toward the rear 2 of the vehicle unlocks that door From that position returning the key to neutral 3 where the key can only be removed and inserted and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors Opening and closing windows The driver s door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto matic operation at the same time To open the windows turn the driver s door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked To close the windows turn the driver s door key to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked Windows stop when the
207. he engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioner system is on turn off the air conditioner Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle s first 500 miles 805 km For the first 500 miles 805 km that you do tow do not drive over 50 MPH 80 km h Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide When making a turn your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels To compensate for this make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle trailer handling possibly caus ing vehicle sway When being passed by larger vehicles be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve hicle handling Do the following if the trailer begins to sway 1 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow This combination will help stabilize the ve hicle Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes When the trailer sway stops gently apply the brakes and pull t
208. he files might not play in the desired order Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 25 Specification chart Supported media CD CD R CD RW Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Apple ISO Romeo Joliet SO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported pee ea MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 5 Supported geom Sampling frequency 8 kHz 48 kHz Bitrate o rate 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR Tag information ID3 tag VER1 0 VER1 1 VER2 2 VER2 3 MP3 only Folder levels Folder levels 8 Max folders 255 including root folder Files 512 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Non BOM Big Endian 05 RE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 4 26 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Troubleshooting guide Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctly Check if the disc is scratched or dirty Check if there is condensation inside the player If there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player Cannot play If there is a temperature increase error the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature Files with extensions other than MP3 mp3 or wma cannot be played In addition the character codes
209. he phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the MQDE button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session Memo pad Main Menu Memo Pad Record Play Delete The Memo Pad records a maximum of 3 voice memos each up to 20 seconds long Record A The system announces Recording and a tone sounds signaling you to begin Speak the information you wish to record clearly When you are done press the 4 4 or MQDE button on the steering wheel A tone sounds and the system announces Memo recorded Another tone sounds to end the VR session If the memo pad is full the system asks if you wish to record over the oldest memo Play The system plays back all the memos in the order of newest to oldest The system ends the VR session 4 52 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems If there are no memos recorded the system an nounces No messages to play The system ends the VR session Delete The Delete command erases all memos The system asks you to confirm this action before deleting all memos Setup Main Menu Setup Pair Phone A List Phone Select Phone Change Priority Delete Phone
210. he system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob jects to help avoid damaging the ve hicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it mis aligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measure ment of obstacles or false alarms The Rear Sonar System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the shift selector is in R Reverse The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet 1 8 m from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a station ary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the sys tem detects an object approaching the tone will sound again The RSS automatically turns on when the shift selector lever is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is ON The RSS OFF switch on the instrument panel allows the dr
211. her injuries Supplemental side air bags and curtain side impact air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system practical away from the supplemental side air bag Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails The side air bags and curtain side impact air bag inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants Because of this the force of the side air bag and curtain side impact air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against these air bag modules during inflation The side air bag and curtain side impact air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over The supplemental side air bags and curtain side impact air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START posi tions After turning the ignition key to the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational 1 49 A WARNING Do not place any objects near the seat back of the front seats Also do not place any objects an umbrella bag etc between the front door finisher and the front seat Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury
212. hicle is impaired by alco hol drugs or some other physical condition Starting and driving 5 5 IGNITION SWITCH A WARNING Never turn the ignition knob to the LOCK position while driving The steering wheel will lock This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury 5 6 Starting and driving LSD0171 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK until the selec tor lever is moved to the P Park position When turning the ignition switch make sure the selector lever is in the P Park position If the selector lever is not returned to the P Park position the ignition switch cannot be moved toward LOCK When the ignition switch cannot be turned to ward the LOCK position while keeping the Intel ligent Key proceed as follows 1 Move the selector lever into the P Park position 2 Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON direction 3 Turn the key toward the LOCK position The selector lever can be moved from the P Park position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC although it does not show on the lock cylinder When the ignition is in OFF the steering wheel is not locked In order for the steering wheel to be locked it must be turned about 1 6 of a turn counterclock
213. hill grades Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than M6 range This reduces fuel economy When shifting up Move the selector lever to the up side Shifts to higher range When shifting down Move the selector lever to the down side Shifts to lower range Moving the selector lever to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession How ever if this motion is rapidly done the second shifting may not be completed properly When canceling the manual shift mode Return the selector lever to the D Drive position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode Inthe manual shift mode the transmis sion may not shift to the selected gear This helps maintain driving perfor mance and reduces the chance of ve hicle damage or loss of control In the manual shift mode the transmis sion may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high When the vehicle speed decreases the transmission auto matically shifts down The transmission shifts to M1 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a complete stop When accel erating again it is necessary to shift up to the desired range When the CVT fluid temperature is ex tremely low the manual shift mode may not work and automatically shift as a drive mode This is not a malfunction In this case return the selector lever to D Drive and drive fora while
214. ht may come on Do not drive on these types of roads If wheels or tires other than the recom mended ones are used the traction control system may not operate prop erly and the indicator light may come on The traction control system is not a sub stitute for winter tires or tire chains ona snow covered road VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM if so equipped When accelerating or driving on slippery sur faces the tires may spin or slide With the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability When the vehicle dynamic control VDC system is operating the slip indicator in the instrument panel blinks lf the slip indicator blinks the road condi tions are slippery Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions See Slip indicator light and Vehicle dynamic control VDC off indicator light in the In struments and controls section Indicator light If malfunction occurs in the system the SLIP and indicator lights come on in the instrument panel As long as these indicator lights are on the traction control function is canceled If the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamic control system OFF using the VDC OFF switch VDC functions will be turned off The VDC sys tem will still try to transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to one with more traction when the VDC sys
215. htened to specification at all times It is recom mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure COLD pressure After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure the display if so equipped of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pres sure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km This is because the tire pressure increases as the tire temperature rises This does not indicate a system mal function 5 Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip ment in the vehicle 6 Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire 7 Close the trunk A WARNING e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se cured after use Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop The spare tire is designed for emer gency use See specific instructions un der the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery the instructions and precautions below must be fol lowed A WARNING I
216. i els PE EE ene embod N S E 1 26 Active Head Restraint front seats 05 1 9 Boosler Sd So anwienisewhenentesaesepaeneadarienes 1 33 Seal DES caccuscascatenscese sees eee sce cceueeseee 1 10 Precautions on booster seatS 0 0005 1 33 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 10 Booster seat installation 0 0ece eee 1 35 Chile Solely sapcednverni neues E E wees 1 12 Pregnant WOMEN csceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 14 Supplemental restraint system Pete e eens 1 37 Injured He SONS saga ses eaosdaeny da paceren ties 1 14 Precautions on supplemental restraint Three point type seat belt with retractor 1 14 system seai ier a kang pe oa pte cea teem nae eo 1 37 Seat belt extenders 0 00 c cece ees 1 17 Supplemental a bag AR labels ee er ete eta 1 51 Seat belt maintenance cece eee 1 17 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 52 SEATS Sit upright and well back A WARNING Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat pr
217. icle Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change 6 4 Incase of emergency Use the correct jack up points Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary Never use blocks on or under the jack Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack It may cause the vehicle to move This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip Raise the differentials by hand wee vehicle Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack Never run the engine with a wheel s off Always refer to the proper illustrations for the 2 Place the jack directly under the jack up the ground It may cause the vehicle to correct placement and jack up points for your point as illustrated so the top of the jack move specific vehicle model and jack type contacts the vehicle at the jack up point Align the jack head between the two Carefully read the caution label attached to notches in the front or the rear as shown the jack body and the following instruc Also fit the groove of the jack head between tions the notches as shown 1 Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by The jack should be used on firm and turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut level ground wrench Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground 3 To lift the vehicle securely hol
218. icle Weight GVW Maximum Gross Axle Weight GAW The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle passengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment In addition front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 18 Technical and consumer information Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment such as the trailer hitch will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR Front GAWR Rear GAWR Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR and Towing capacity All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops highway weigh stations building supply centers or salvage yards To determine the available payload capacity for tongue load use the following procedure 1 Locate the GVWR on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 2 Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer 3
219. icle is to be left outside without anti freeze drain the cooling system including the engine block Refill before operating the vehicle For details see Changing engine coolant in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual TIRE EQUIPMENT 1 SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave ment However the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions If you operate your ve hicle on snowy or icy roads NISSAN recom mends the use of MUD amp SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type size speed rating and availability informa tion 2 For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires 5 24 Starting and driving 3 Tire chains may be used For details see Tire chains in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter e A scraper and stiff bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades e A sturdy flat board to be placed under the j
220. ider een dex edess 2 3 Speedometer and odometer 0ce eens 2 3 TaChOMGIGl six tiucknes eeri anen a e cawsesds 2 4 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 FUC Gauge sidsrarars esere rani na inea nana send 2 2 5 Compass display if so equipped 0 0e eee 2 6 Zone variation change procedure 2 7 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 9 Checking DUIS cecvorudsraeues v4eanseabes bongs 2 9 WY Sr ICIS s se cine poet ce seeria ene spas aa tec 2 10 INGICEION IGS 22420 ceecesgeeees peeeae pees aed 2 13 Audible reminders 00 ccc cece e eee eee 2 16 Security SYSIEMS occ send enecesarcne eet eeeese deeds 2 16 Vehicle security system ccs252ceccneeesindense ox 2 16 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system 2 18 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 19 OWICIPODELALON 2 455 0006256 05408440e00 H 244486 2 19 Rear window and outside mirror if so equipped defroster switch scsoneveccverioatesanaee set ec ana ee 2 20 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 21 Xenon headlights if so equipped 5 2 21 Headlight control SWitChwa scscieasvsess es western 2 29 Daytime running light system Canada only 2 24 Instrument brightness control 005 2 25 T rn signal SWICK cucccchivceee rey eesdutec ees ad 2 25 Fog Iont SWIC cntveecctateuweiveduewetesdans 2 25 Comenng light ccaeruniaey soso eeawanay osaw ee 2 26 Hazard warni
221. if the supplemental side air bag inflates Right after inflation several side air bag and curtain side impact air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may severely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain side impact air bag system This is to prevent acci dental inflation of the side air bag and curtain side impact air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain side impact air bag system Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or side panel This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag and curtain side impact air bag system Tampering with the supplemental side air bag system may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing mate rial near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers around the side air bag Work around and on the curtain air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The SRS wiring harnesses should not be modified or discon nected Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or cur tain air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we re
222. il ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident 1 46 Status light The front passenger air bag status light is located below the radio The light operates as follows Unoccupied passenger s seat The is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Passenger s seat occupied by a small adult child or child restraint as outlined in this section The 2 _ illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Occupied passenger seat and the passen ger meets the conditions outlined in this section The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is opera tional Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to auto matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U S regulations If the front passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a crash The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system to certain front passenger seat occupants such as children by requiring the air bag to be auto matically turned OFF Certain sensors
223. ill To avoid damaging the area behind the fascia apply only light pres sure to the drill Insert the grommets into the holes in the bumper fascia Insert a small flat bladed screwdriver into the grommet hole to turn the threaded part of the grommet 90 Mount the license plate bracket using the two longer screws Use the two shorter hex head screws to mount the license plate to the license plate bracket VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION AWARNING it is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle Curb Weight actual weight of your vehicle vehicle weight including standard and optional equipment flu ids emergency tools and spare tire assembly This weight does not in clude passengers and cargo GVW Gross Vehicle Weight curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rat ing maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle pas sengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment This information is lo cated on the F M
224. ind you to fasten your seat belts The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is turned to the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver s seat belt is fastened At the same time the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver s seat belt is securely fastened The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger s seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger s seat is occupied For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position the system does not activate the warn ing light for the front passenger Refer to Seat belts in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section for precautions on seat belt usage e Supplemental air bag warning J light When the ignition key is in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the supplemental front air bags supplemental side air bags curtain side impact air bags and pre tensioner seat belt systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Unless checked and repaired the supplemental
225. indicator light Instruments and controls 2 13 Cruise set switch indicator light The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system If the light blinks while the engine is running it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning prop erly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer The front passenger air bag status light F2 will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used Front passenger air bag status light For front passenger air bag status light operation see Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual Eo High beam indicator light blue This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated 2 14 Instruments and controls Malfunction indicator light SOON MIL If the malfunction indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running it may indi cate a potential emission control and or CVT malfunction The malfunction indicator light may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing or if the vehicle runs out of fuel Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly and that the vehicle has at least
226. inflation because of the object s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation such as if a child is standing on the seat or if two children are on the seat contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly Using the passenger air bag status light you can monitor when the front passenger air bag Is au tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied The light will not illuminate when the front pas senger seat is unoccupied If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen ger air bag status light is illuminated indicating that the air bag is OFF it could be that the person is a small adult or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly If a child restraint must be used in the front seat the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used If the air bag status light is not illuminated indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash it could be Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly If the air bag status light is not illuminated reposition
227. ing key by using the joystick Then se lect the Audio or HVAC key using the joystick or by pressing the ENTER button The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button 7 21 OUTSIDE 79 F LHA0651 Any time audio information is shown on the main part of the screen HVAC information will be displayed on the lower part of the screen HVAC information will be shown even if Audio is se lected to be displayed on the lower part of the screen VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS Adjust Driver Seat When Exiting Vehicle Lift Steering Column When Exiting Vehicle Selective Door Unlock Keyless Remote Response Horn Vehicle electronic systems Select the Vehicle Electronic Systems key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER but ton The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen will be displayed You can set the following operating conditions by selecting the desired item using the joystick then pressing the ENTER button The indicator light box at the left of the selected item alternately turns on and off each time the ENTER button is pressed Indicator light is illuminated ON Indicator light is not illuminated OFF Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 13 VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS a CY Keyless Remote Response Lights Lock and Unlock Auto Re Lock Time n p Sensitivity of Auto
228. ing for a response The system will end the VR session Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to go back to the previous command you can say Go back or Correction any time the system is waiting for a response When you get used to the menus in the system you can talk ahead by saying more than one command at a time For example say Call five five five one two one two or Memo pad record Also when you get used to the system re sponses you can skip ahead to the tone by pressing the 4 4 button on the steering wheel However if you press the 4 4 button when the system is waiting for a response from you it will end the VR session Call Main Menu Call Name speak name A Number speak digits Redial Call Back Name speak name A If you have stored entries in the Phone Book you can dial a number associated with a name and location See Phone book later in this section to learn how to store entries Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 49 When prompted by the system say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call The system acknowledges the name If there are multiple locations associated with the name the system asks you to choose the loca tion Once you have confirmed the name and location the system begins the call Number
229. ing the foot brake pedal 1 WSD0050 Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Move the shift selector lever to the P Park position 3 To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL NO CURB Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen ter of the road if it moves Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion and remove the key Starting and driving 5 17 POWER STEERING The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump driven by the engine to assist steering If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks you will still have control of the vehicle However much greater steering effort is needed especially in sharp turns and at low speeds A WARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power ass
230. injury if the supplemen tal front air bag inflates Immediately after inflation several front air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may se verely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or front end structure This could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing mate rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers on the seat that are not specifi cally designed to assure proper air bag operation Additionally do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classifica tion sensor pr
231. inutes A CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window be careful not to scratch or dam age the rear window defroster NOTE The top few rows of wires on the rear win dow are not part of the rear window de froster system These wires make up the antenna for the audio system HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS if so equipped A WARNING Z HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on they produce a high voltage To prevent an electric shock never attempt to modify or disassemble Always have your xe non headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional head lights If they are not correctly aimed they might temporarily blind an oncom ing driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident If headlights are not aimed correctly immediately take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly When the xenon headlight is initially turned on its brightness or color varies slightly However the color and brightness will soon stabilize The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on off opera tion It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals for example when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out the brightness will drasti cally decrease the light will start blink ing or
232. ion of FM AM or SAT stations 1 Choose preset bank A B or C using the PRESET A B C select button 2 Select the desired FM AM or SAT station band 3 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard 4 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 5 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band not AM band Cur rently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove Music or programming type such as Clas sical Country or Rock Artist and song information If the station broadcasts RDS information the RDS icon is displayed Compact disc CD changer operation Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start play ing To insert the disc first press t
233. ir priority level The system then gives you the option to delete a specific phone all phones or listen to the list again Once you chose to delete a phone or all phones the system asks you to confirm this action Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 53 NOTE When you delete a phone the associated phone book for that phone will also be deleted Select ringtone Use the Select Ringtone command to select the tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is received The system announces the name of the active phone and asks you to choose from the following commands Ringtone The system plays a ringtone and asks if you would like to select that tone If you say No the system plays the next ringtone available and continues to cycle through the ringtones until you select one or quit Silent The system asks you to confirm your wish to disable the ringtone Bluetooth off Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System When the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone Sys tem is off you will not be able to make or receive calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition Also you will not have access to the Phone Book You can still use the Memo Pad and access Setup SPEAKER ADAPTATION SA MODE Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out of dialect users to train the system to improve rec ognition accuracy By repeating a nu
234. ist for the steering will not work Steering will be harder to operate 5 18 Starting and driving BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits If one circuit malfunctions you will still have braking at two wheels BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum If the engine stops you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal However greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis tance will be longer Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving This will overheat the brakes wear out the brakes and pads faster and reduce gas mileage To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control A WARNING While driving on a slippery surface be careful when braking accelerating or downshifting Abrupt braking or accel erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the brakes will not work Braking will be harder Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water the brakes may get wet As a result your braking distance will be longer and the vehicl
235. itch Is in ON position The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the AUTO Dd or Z position Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru ment panel lights when driving at night The instrument brightness control will not adjust the brightness when the headlights or parking lights are off TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal Q Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction When the turn is com pleted the turn signals cancel automatically Lane change signal 2 To signala lane change move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash but the lever does not latch FOG LIGHT SWITCH To turn the fog lights on turn the headlight switch to the position then turn the fog light switch to the 0 position To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position the headlights must be on then turn the fog light switch tothe 0 position To turn the fog lights off turn the fog light switch to the OFF position The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected Instruments and controls 2 25 CORNERING LIGHT The cornering light provides additional illumina tion toward the turning direction The cornering light will illuminate on the turning direction side when a turn is signaled with the hea
236. iver to turn the RSS on and off To turn the RSS off the ignition must be ON and the shift selector lever in R Reverse An indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off it may indicate a failure in the RSS Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing apply de icer through the key hole If the lock becomes frozen heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob if so equipped ANTI FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem perature will drop below 32 F 0 C check the anti freeze to assure proper winter protection For details see Engine cooling system in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery To maintain maxi mum efficiency the battery should be checked regularly For details see Battery in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual Starting and driving 5 23 DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the veh
237. ke sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition ON or ACC for a long time it will use up all the battery power and the engine will not start Reference symbols ENTER button This is a button on the control panel Display key This is a select key on the screen By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON Use the joystick to choose an item on the display screen Move the joystick up down left or right to highlight an item Then press the ENTER button to select the item or perform the action HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON This button has two functions e Go back to the previous display cancel If you press the BACK button during setup the setup will be canceled and or the display will return to the previous screen Finish setup In some screens pressing the BACK button ac cepts the changes made during setup SETTING UP THE START UP SCREEN When you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON the system start up warning is displayed on the screen Read the warning and select the OK key by pressing the ENTER button If you do not press the ENTER button the Navi gation system will not proceed to the next step in the Navigation display If you do not touch a button or screen key for more than 1 minute on the system start up warn ing screen the screen will change to the audio screen automatic
238. key cylinder is released WPD0291 Inside lock LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the lock position then close the door To unlock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the unlock position 2 LPD0183 Door lock switch Type A LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the lock position When locking the door this way be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle To unlock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the unlock position Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 5 WPD0381 Door lock switch Type B 3 6 Pre driving checks and adjustments Lockout protection When the power door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition and any door open all doors will lock and then unlock auto matically This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle APD1010 CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally especially when small children are in the vehicle The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors When the lever is in the lock position the door can be opened only from the out
239. l button several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will advance the num ber of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played MIX RPT mix and repeat button When the MIX RPT button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Repeat All Repeat Track Mix All Tracks Repeat All Repeat All the entire disc will be repeated Repeat Track the current track will be repeated Mix All Tracks all tracks will be played randomly SCAN button While listening to a CD press the A SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD playing Pressing the A SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the CD remains on that track CD AUX Auxiliary button The AUX jack is located on the CD player The AUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana log audio input such as from a portable cassette tape CD player MP3 player or laptop computers Press the CD AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX Jack al CD EJECT Whenthe amp button is pressed with the com pact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected When amp button is pressed while the com pact disc is being played the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off CD IN indicator CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loa
240. l satellite receiver and i TM 3 SCAN RPT button 9 SAT button a ee eee ea 10 AUXb satellite radio service subscription is active Sat 4 DISP button utton ellite radio not available in Alaska Hawaii and 5 PRESET A B C button 11 LOAD button Guan 6 CD button 12 CD insert slot 4 36 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Audio main operation POWER VOLUME control Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and then press the PWR VOL control knob while the sys tem is off to call up the mode radio or CD which was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the PWR VOL con trol knob Turn the PWR VOL control knob to adjust the volume This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen sitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes AUDIO knob BASS MIDRANGE TREBLE FADE BALANCE and SSV if so equipped Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as follows BASS MID TREBLE FADE BALANCE SSV if so equipped To adjust Bass Mid Midrange Treble Fade and Balance press the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears in the display Turn the Tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance modes Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speaker
241. l sparks Hydrogen gas gener ated by the battery is explosive Do not WDI0224 allow battery fluid to contact your skin eyes fabrics or painted surfaces After touching a battery or battery cap do not touch or rub your eyes Thoroughly wash your hands If the acid contacts your eyes skin or clothing immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention 1 Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver as shown Use a cloth to protect the battery case Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat reduce bat tery life and in some cases lead to an explosion Maintenance and do it yourself 8 13 2 Check the fluid level in each cell If it is necessary to add fluid add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening Do not overfill 8 14 Maintenance and do it yourself Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual If the engine does not start by jump starting the battery may have to be replaced Contact a NISSAN dealer DRIVE BELTS Power steering fluid pump Crankshaft Generator Air conditioner sae ce ee A WARNING Be sure the ignition key is in the OF
242. l stay on for approximately 5 sec onds Ifthe battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the memory storage function will be canceled and must be restarted before a stored memory position can be set again Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the memory storage function You can also restart the memory storage function using the following procedure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than two times with the ignition key in the LOCK position Once the memory storage function has been restarted you can store a memory position See Memory storage function earlier in this section 3 30 Pre driving checks and adjustments Selecting the memorized position Set the CVT selector lever to the P Park posi tion then Within 45 seconds of opening the driver s door push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at least 1 second or Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at least 1 second The driver s seat steering column and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indicator light blinking and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds ENTRY EXIT FUNCTION This system is designed so that the driver s seat and automatic operation steering column if so equipped will automatically move when the CVT selector lever is in the P Park position This
243. ld always be correctly worn and the occu pant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel instrument panel and door finish ers See Seat belts earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position After turning the ignition key to the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational 1 37 Sit upright and well back A WARNING The supplemental front air bags ordi narily will not inflate in the event of a side impact rear impact rollover or lower severity frontal collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section WRS0031 The seat belts and the supplemental front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The front air bags inflate with great force Even with the NISSAN Ad vanced Air Bag System if you are unre strained leaning forward sitting side ways or out of position in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death ina crash
244. le or are extremely dete riorated the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance and the VDC OFF indica tor light may come on When driving on extremely inclined sur faces such as higher banked corners the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on Do not drive on these types of roads When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may illuminate This is not a malfunction Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface 5 22 Starting and driving If wheels or tires other than the recom mended ones are used the vehicle dy namic control system may not operate properly and the vehicle dynamic con trol off indicator light may come on The vehicle dynamic control system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road REAR SONAR SYSTEM if so equipped WSD0170 AWARNING Always turn and look back before back ing up The RSS is not a substitute for proper backing procedures Read and understand the limitations of the rear sonar system as contained in this section Inclement weather may af fect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects T
245. le up every time you drive even if your seating position includes a supple mental air bag Most U S states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven 1 10 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Sit upright and well back A WARNING A WARNING Every person who drives or rides in this The seat belt should be properly ad vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit Failure to do so may times Children should be properly re reduce the effectiveness of the entire strained in the rear seat and if appro restraint system and increase the priate in a child restraint chance or severity of injury in an acci dent Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 11 A WARNING e Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never run the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS NOT THE WAIST A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted Doing so may reduce its ef
246. ledges the name and asks you for the location you would like to edit Say the name of the location The system ac knowledges and asks you for the phone number you would like to store with this location See How to say numbers earlier in this section for more information The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers choose Store The system confirms the name location and number then announces that the entry has been stored The system then ends the VR session Delete Use the Delete command to erase one entry from the phone book all entries from the phone book the current redial number or the current call back number Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 51 To delete entries from the phone book say a name or All entries when prompted by the sys tem The system acknowledges the command and asks you to confirm the deletion To delete the current redial number or call back number say redial number or call back num ber when prompted by the system If a redial number or a call back number exists the system deletes them without asking for confirma tion If there is no number for the entry you are trying to delete the system says so and ends the VR session List names O Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book The system recites t
247. lerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables floor pan and fenders In winter the underbody must be cleaned periodically For additional protection against rust and corro sion which may be required in some areas con sult a NISSAN dealer 8 Maintenance and do it yourself Maintenance requirements 2 2 02ee00 8 2 General maintenance 0 0c cece eee eee 8 2 Explanation of general maintenance items 8 2 Maintenance precautionS ss essea cece eee eee 8 5 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine cooling system 0c veesccegesecevateareegee ens 8 7 Checking engine coolant level 005 8 7 Changing engine coolant 2 00e 0e 8 8 PACING Cll cercscuceesweunieeererenyceaeseecres ta 8 8 Checking engine oil level 000 005 8 8 Changing engine oil 2 2 eee eee eee 8 9 Changing engine oil filter 0005 8 10 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid 8 11 Power steering fluid ct steseenleosenseareateceres ce 8 11 EARS eg te yet vere one areca ae Beem Bade eaiees 8 11 Selca o E E E E 8 12 Window washer fluid sicer exc sevceeieveseaesreewr 8 12 Window washer fluid reservoir 5 8 12 SEA A E E E E E 8 13 Jump SIAMING sorne as rasera EA E 8 14 Drive Dele saros b ngewce een E yc ei E E 8 14 Segoe ee ae E E ee ee E 8 15 Re
248. ll tend to fade and or drift Static and flutter During signal interference from buildings large hills or due to antenna position usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter static or flutter can be heard This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response Multipath reception Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time The signals may cancel each other resulting in mo mentary flutter or loss of sound AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals because of their low frequency can bend around objects and skip along the ground In addition the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth Because of these characteristics AM signals are also sub ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver Fading Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist Static Caused by thunderstorms electrical power lines electric signs and even traffic lights SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION if so equipped When the satellite radio is first installed or the battery has been replaced the satellite radio may not work properly This is not a malfunction Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle out
249. llowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb A WARNING Z HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on they pro duce a high voltage To prevent an electric shock never attempt to modify or disas semble Always have your xenon head lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer For additional information see Headlight and turn signal switch in the Instru ments and controls section Replacing the halogen headlight bulb The headlight is a semi sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight halogen bulb Be cause the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement see your NISSAN dealer A CAUTION Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb When aiming adjustment is necessary contact a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 25 Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog This is not a malfunction If large drops of water collect inside the lens contact a NISSAN dealer e Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time Dust moisture smoke etc entering the headligh
250. m TPMS 6 2 Changing a attire 0s etenws eceweees read ie mane 6 2 Jump SCAM ode as ce teen dere ae wees Lee eee eee 6 7 Push Stains oseese nee wee a EE E 6 9 If your vehicle overheatS 0 cece eee eens 6 9 TOWING YOUN vehicle 25 2200 dee aes cove denen canna ees 6 10 Towing recommended by NISSAN 6 11 Vehicle recovery freeing a stuck vehicle FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pres sure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light Is lit one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated If equipped the system also displays pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the TPMS will acti vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h For more details refer to Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section Tire pressure information in the Display screen heater air conditioner and audio and phone sys tems section and Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys tem TPMS in the Starting and driving section 6 2 Incase of emergency WARN
251. m off switch 2 29 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch lt lt i 46 80 444m amp 2 20 Traction control system TCS off SWIG oie a ede hay ee Ee cet 2 28 Turn signal switch 2 25 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off SWIC s am a 8 i aa oan ew Se aS 2 29 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 19 T TaChometers lt s6 8 20 4 00 Kae dea 2 4 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 9 Theft NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine Stalls sa eae ewe eed 2 18 3 3 5 7 Three way catalyst 5 2 Tire Flat tS oes Qe Sree og Boe ee eae 6 2 Spare tire ooa aa ee 6 3 8 43 Tii echaSss sesa aed ee 6 he oe eS 8 40 10 6 Tire placard 20004 9 11 Tire pressure 2 tu mah ee te ee es 8 32 Tire rotation 0 6 s 86 ee ew ees 8 40 Types Of tires 5 os 6 ew ee ede Bow bon 8 39 Uniform tire quality grading 9 24 Wheels andtires 8 32 Wheel tire size aaou 9 8 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light 2 11 Tire pressure display aoaaa aaa 4 10 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Tire rotation maintenance reminder 4 10 Top tether strap child restraint 1 21 Towing Flat towing oaoa a 9 23 Tow truck towing sasaaa aaa 6 10 Towing load specification 9 19 Trailer towing 0200 9 16 Traction control system TCS off switch 2 28 Transceiver
252. matic Headlights _ N00 Automatic Headlights Off Delay ds iy T 2 Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle With this option ON the driver s seat automati cally moves back and returns to the original po sition for ease of exit and entry Lift steering column when exiting vehicle With this option ON the steering column auto matically tilts up and returns to the original posi tion for ease of exit and entry Selective door unlock Select to change which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation Only the driver s door gt All the doors VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS A Coo S Speed Dependent Wiper Intelligent Key Lock Response Sound Intelligent Key Unlock Response Beep Sound Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Function Keyless remote response horn Select to turn on or turn off the horn chirp mode used when the LOCK button on the Intelligent Key is pressed NOTE If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the Intelligent Key the display screen will not show the current mode Use the Intelligent Key to return to the previous mode and re enable the dis play screen control 4 14 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS Return All Settings to Default Keyless remote response lights Select to turn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode used when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key is p
253. mber of commands the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system The system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for memory A and memory B If memory A is available the system will use memory A to store the model If memory A is in use and memory B is available the system will use memory B to store the model If both of the memory locations are in use the system will ask the user to select which memory location should be overwritten Training procedure The procedure for training a voice is as follows 1 Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location 2 Sit in the driver s seat with the engine run ning the parking brake on and the transmis sion in P Park 3 Press and hold the 4 4 than 5 seconds button for more 4 54 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 10 Press the 4 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND 4 4 button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END MODE button to select a dif ferent language button For information on selecting a different lan guage see Choosing a language earlier in this section Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically If both memory locations are already in use the system will prompt you to overwrite one Follow the instructions pro vided by the system When preparation is
254. mended for unleaded gasoline If an oxygenate blend other than methanol blend is used it should con tain no more than 10 oxygenate MTBE may however be added up to 15 If a methanol blend is used it should contain no more than 5 methanol methyl alcohol wood alcohol It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro sion inhibitors If not properly formu lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and or vehicle performance problems At this time sufficient data is not avail able to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN ve hicles If any driveability problems such as engine stall ing and difficult hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate blend fuels immediately change to a non oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE Technical and consumer information 9 3 Take care not to spill gasoline during refu eling Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage E 85 fuel E 85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline E 85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV Do not use E 85 in your vehicle U S government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region Aftermarket fuel additive
255. mental front impact air bags P 1 37 Seats P 1 2 10 Occupant classification sensor pressure sensor P 1 44 11 Seat belt pretensioners P 1 50 12 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren P 1 20 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details fe a 0 2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT Engine hood P 3 18 Headlight and turn signal switch P 2 21 Replacing bulbs P 8 29 Windshield wiper and washer switch P 2 19 Windshield P 8 19 Sunroof if so equipped P 2 39 Power windows P 2 37 Door locks Intelligent key system keys request button P 3 4 3 7 3 2 3 7 Mirrors P 3 25 Tire pressure P 8 32 Flat tire P 6 2 Tire chains P 8 40 Cornering light P 2 26 Fog light switch P 2 25 Tie down hooks P 6 12 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 3 EXTERIOR REAR 0 4 Illustrated table of contents N SOOL E ad 10 11 12 Rear window defroster switch P 2 20 Rear sun shade if so equipped P 2 41 Interior trunk lid release P 3 20 Trunk lid P 3 18 Vehicle loading P 9 12 Tie down hook P 6 12 Exterior trunk lid release request button P 3 12 Rear sonar system P 5 22 Replacing bulbs P 8 29 Fuel filler cap fuel recommendation P 3 21 P 9 3 Fuel filler door P 3 20 Child safety locks
256. mmands 3 Say the number you wish to call 8 For example 555 1212 can be said as five five five one two one two See How to say numbers earlier in this section for more information 4 When you have finished speaking the phone number the system repeats it back and an nounces the available commands 5 Say Dial The system acknowledges the command and makes the call For additional command options see List of voice commands later in this section Receiving a call When you hear the ring tone press the 4 button on the steering wheel Once the call has ended press the MQPF button on the steering wheel NOTE If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone press the MQDE button on the steering wheel For additional command options see List of voice commands later in this section LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu Call Phone Book Memo Pad Setup When you press and release the 4 4 button on the steering wheel you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu The following pages describe these commands and the com mands in each sub menu Remember to wait for the tone before speaking You can say Help to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response If you want to end an action without completing it you can say Cancel or Quit at any time the system is wait
257. mpact force on the face and chest of the front occupants They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body Even with NISSAN advanced air bags seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel The supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants Because of this the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the front air bag module during inflation The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The supplemental front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position After turning the ignition key to the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational 1 45 Front passenger air bag and status light A WARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con ditions Read this section carefully to learn how it operates Proper use of the seat seat belt and child restraints is nec essary for most effective protection Fa
258. mpressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10 1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn t hear Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second ID3 tag The ID3 tag is the part of the encoded MP3 file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist album title encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album Artist Track title line on the display FOLDER MP3 Playback order chart WHA0543 Playback order Playback order of the CD with compressed files MP3 is as illustrated The names of folders not containing MP3 files are not shown in the display If there is a file in the top level of the disc ROOT is displayed The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore t
259. ms in place of a booster seat Items such as these may move during normal driving or a collision and result in serious injury or death Booster seats are designed to be used with a lap shoulder belt Booster seats are de signed to properly route the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt over the strongest portions of a child s body to provide the maximum protection dur ing a collision Follow all of the booster seat manufac turer s instructions for installation and use When purchasing a booster seat be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle It may not be possible to properly install some types of booster seats in your vehicle If the booster seat and seat belt is not used properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases Adjustable seatbacks should be posi tioned to fit the booster seat but as upright as possible Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 33 After placing the child in the booster seat and fastening the seat belt make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the abdomen Do not put the shoulder belt behind the child or under the child s arm If you must install a booster seat in the front seat see Booster seat installation later in this section When your booster seat is not in use keep it secured with a sea
260. must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s operation and the outside temperature Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi nate If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature check the tire pres sure for all four tires You can also check the pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen if so equipped The order of the tire pres sure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position See Tire pressure information in the Display screen heater air conditioner and audio and phone systems section 5 4 Starting and driving For additional information see Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section and Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the In case of emergency section A WARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Serious vehicle damage could
261. must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B and C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con crete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 9 24 Technical and consumer information A WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B and C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resis
262. n Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used 7 6 Appearance and care Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro sion to those parts which are not well ventilated Air pollution Industrial pollution the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas or heavy road salt use acceler ates the corrosion process Road salt also accel erates the disintegration of paint surfaces TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation Check the underbody for accumulation of sand dirt or salt If present wash with water as soon as possible A CAUTION e NEVER remove dirt sand or other de bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them Chemicals used for road surface de icing are extremely corrosive They acce
263. n changing or replacing tires be sure all four tires are of the same type i e Summer All Season or Snow and construction A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type size speed rating and availability e Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod els to provide good performance all year includ ing snowy and icy road conditions All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M amp S on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads Summer tire performance is substantially re duced in snow and Ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M amp S on the tire sidewall If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels Snow tires If snow tires are needed it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and l
264. n in the previous illustrations Do not lean against the door Supplemental side air bag and curtain side impact air bag The supplemental side air bag and cur tain side impact air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal im pact rear impact rollover or lower se verity side collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents 1 42 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system A WARNING e When sitting in the rear seat do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat If the side air bag inflates you may be seriously injured Be especially careful with children who should always be properly restrained Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations e Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 43 1 GROWN SRS curtain side impact air bag 6 Crash zone sensor modules 7 Occupant classification system control SRS curtain side impact air bags unit Supplemental side air bag modules 8 Seat belt buckle switches for driver s Diagnosis sensor unit and passenger s side Supplemental front air bag modules 44 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 9 Occupant classification sensor pressure sensor 10 Seat belt pre tension
265. n on as long as the switch is on When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the switch off CAUTION Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cush ion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overheated Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object This may result in damage to the heater Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth When cleaning the seat never use gasoline benzine thinner or any simi lar materials If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running Instruments and controls 2 27 HEATED STEERING WHEEL if so equipped LICO421 The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below approximately 68 F 20 C The heated steering wheel switch is located on the front of the console box Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts The indicator light will come on lf the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68 F 20 C the system will heat th
266. n on the garage door open er s motor and the training light is lit you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7 Use the help of a second person for conve nience to assist when performing this step 7 Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas ing the garage door opener program button quickly and firmly press and release the HomeLink button you ve just programmed Press and release the HomeLink button up to 3 times to complete the training 8 Your HomeLink button should now be pro grammed To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers follow steps 2 8 only NOTE Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to clear all previously programmed HomeLink buttons If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS Prior to 1992 D O C regulations required hand held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec onds To program your hand held transmitter to HomeLink continue to press and hold the HomeLink button note steps 2 4 under Pro gramming HomeLink while you press and re press cycle your hand held transmitters every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly indicating successful programming NOTE When programming a garage door opener etc it is advised to unplug
267. n the driver s side door is open the doors are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds CAUTION The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the rear parcel shelf When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the glove box or a storage bin When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the door pockets When the Intelligent Key is placed on or under the spare tire area When the Intelligent Key is placed in side or near metallic materials The lockout protection may function when the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle but it is too close to the vehicle Unlocking doors 1 Carry the Intelligent Key 2 Push the door handle request switch 3 The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once 4 Push the door handle request switch again within 1 minute to unlock all doors If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors that door may not be unlocked Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door If the door does not unlock after return ing the door handle push the door handle re quest switch to unlock the door All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operatio
268. n the tank The gauge may move slightly during braking turning acceleration or going up or down hills The gauge needle returns to E Empty after the ignition key is turned to OFF The low fuel warning light iS comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank Is getting low Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis ters E Empty Instruments and controls 2 5 The lt indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the driver s side of the vehicle CAUTION if the vehicle runs out of fuel SERVICE eae the ENGINE malfunction indicator light MIL may come on Refuel as soon as possible After a few driving trips SERVICE the ENGINE light should turn off If the light remains on after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see Mal function indicator light MIL later in this section 2 6 Instruments and controls COMPASS DISPLAY if so equipped This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in dicates the direction of the vehicle s heading With the ignition switch in the ON position press the button as described in the chart below to activate various features of the automatic anti glare rearview mirror Feature Push button again for about 1 sec ond to change settings Push and hold the button for about Compass display toggles on off Compass zone can be changed to correct false compass readin
269. nce and do it yourself section of this manual 7 For Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF DEXRON III MERCON or equivalent ATF may also be used 9 2 Technical and consumer information Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI RON 91 1 Engine oil with API Certification Mark 2 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 2 50 Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant or equivalent 50 Demineralized or distilled water Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 3 Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent 7 Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid 4 or equivalent DOT 3 NLGI No 2 Lithium Soap base HFC 134a R 134a 5 NISSAN A C System Oil Type S or equivalent 5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Antifreeze or equivalent FUEL RECOMMENDATION NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded pre mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI Anti Knock Index number Research oc tane number 96 If unleaded premium gasoline is not available you may use unleaded regular gaso line with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number Research octane number 91 but you may notice a decrease in performance CAUTION Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst
270. nd re peats opening or tilting up the sunroof keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens the sunroof will fully close gradu ally Make sure nothing is caught in the sunroof A WARNING In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof Al ways use seat belts and child restraints Do not allow anyone to stand up or ex tend any portion of their body out of the sunroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is closing A CAUTION e Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the sunroof before opening Do not place heavy objects on the sun roof or surrounding area Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for ward or backward If the sunroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof REAR SUN SHADE if so equipped CAUTION e To avoid personal injury keep your hands fingers and head away from the sun shade arm arm rail and screen inlet port Do not allow children near the rear sun shade system They could be injured Do not place objects on or near the rear sun shade This could cause improper operation or damage it Do not pull or push the rear sun shade This could cause improper operation or damage it Arm rail Screen Caution label 4 Sunshade arms The rear sun shade operates when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position oa The rear sun shade switches
271. nd type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label See Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer informa tion section of this manual For detailed information see Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual The Anti lock Braking System ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre vent each wheel from locking and sliding By preventing each wheel from locking the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip pery surfaces Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down De press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure but do not pump the brakes The ABS will oper ate to prevent the wheels from locking up Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles A WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal Doing so may result in increased stopping distances Self test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors electric pumps hydraulic solenoids and a computer The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
272. nditioner audio and phone systems label side facing up The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start play ing If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the POWER VOLUME control knob will start the compact disc CD AUX button When the CD AUX button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the CD AUX button is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play lt gt TUNE Rewind and Fast Forward button When the TUNE button 4 or gt s pressed while the compact disc is being played the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc will return to normal play speed a Gi SEEK button When the SEEK button M is pressed for less than 1 5 seconds while a compact disc is playing the track being played returns to its beginning Press M button several times to skip back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the SEEK button gt I is pressed for less than 1 5 seconds while a compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press P
273. near each other Do not allow the two vehicles to touch Apply the parking brake Move the shift se lector lever to P Park Switch off all unnec essary electrical systems lights heater air conditioner etc In case of emergency Cloth 3 Remove vent caps on the battery if so equipped Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard 4 Connect jumper cables in the sequence il lustrated A CAUTION e Always connect positive to positive and negative to body ground for example strut mounting bolt engine lift bracket etc not to the battery e Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal 5 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes 6 Keep the engine speed of the booster ve hicle at about 2 000 rpm and start the en gine of the vehicle being jump started A CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds If the engine does not start right away turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again 7 After starting the engine carefully discon nect the negative cable and then the positive cable 8 Replace the vent caps if so equipped Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid PUSH STARTING Do not start the en
274. needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the VDC system off To turn off the VDC system push the VDC OFF switch The indicator will come on Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system See Vehicle dy namic control VDC system in the Starting and driving section REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH if so equipped LICO471 A WARNING The rear sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper back ing Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly The rear sonar system is active when the ignition is inthe ON position and the shift selector lever is in R Reverse When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft 1 8 m of the rear bumper a beeping tone is emitted The rear sonar system can be disabled by push ing the OFF switch When the system is disabled the indicator light on the switch will illuminate Push the switch again to enable the system The indicator light will go off The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is turned on See Rear sonar system in the Starting and driving section Instruments and controls 2 29 POWER OUTLET LICO997 Instrument panel The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones They are rated at 12 Volt 120 W 10A maximum The power outlet located in the front center con sole is powered directly by the vehi
275. nents As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle The new keys must be regis tered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Im mobilizer System of your vehicle Since the reg 3 2 Pre driving checks and adjustments istration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer A key number plate is supplied with your keys Record the key number and keep it in a safe place such as your wallet not in the vehicle If you lose your keys see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from If you still have a key your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it A CAUTION Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function Do not drop the Intelligent Key Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C e Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet Do not place the I
276. nfants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION A WARNING e NISSAN recommends that booster seats be installed in the rear seat How ever if you must install a booster seat in the front passenger seat move the pas senger s seat to the rearmost position The 4 passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats Never use the rear console as a seating position or for a child restraint A CAUTION Do not use the lap shoulder belt auto matic locking retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts WRS0699 Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat 1 If you must install a booster seat in the front seat move the seat to the rear most position Position the booster seat on the seat Only place it in a front facing direction Always follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 35 LRS0451 Rear center position for 5 passenger mod els only LRS0452 Rear outboard position The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable If neces sary adjust or remove the head r
277. ng flasher switch 0000005 2 26 HOM sg eced cce oops oases oes eeee awed AS ARA 2 27 Heated seats if so equipped 0e ee ee aee 2 27 Heated steering wheel if so equipped 2 28 Traction control system TCS off switch Ui SO CQUIDDEG cco wechee actwce cannes eectucds sewed 2 28 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch if so equipped 4 sc0ncnbeactucaeecesaeseaeesuees 2 29 Rear sonar system off switch if so equipped 2 29 POWEr OUE cn cwtuadcewpinenctcneerondewmaceieaes 2 30 Sa Ee e wc cxsonseeacdaus aeeeetacteeen cease aneeeee 2 31 Map POCKCIS s2042 vataeecnedeenetaeeseesascees 2 31 Seatback pockets xn totic ade wie saawacekosuees 2 31 Sunglasses holder nn nunaa an dee weed ome 2 32 Gup HOGS secorre rissen STEE Ea DEEN 2 32 Ear a EE E E E sateen eco 2 34 Console BOX seaseuudavenceuecyeeucete ese tei 2 34 Rear center console if so equipped 2 35 Covered storage DOX 0i sc0daee eas wdavrcneens 2 35 roce MOOK Ss cae ein Marans retene Fae eee 2 36 Cargo NES 52 S nn rene xaetosen ce eee nanii ae 2 36 WINKOWSs452 cee5005ebecaceesedgsoneacetegacesucd 2 37 Fower WINKOWS oc oeeieecatsce tee eeueeeaes 2 37 SkyView glass paneled roof 2 02 00 2 39 Sunroof if so equipped ce enccccunceaerscaaeeewas 2 39 Automatic SUNTOOT ts ca seu sad vececaseesgasebexdt 2 39 Rear sun shade if so equipped e0 eee 2 41 INCCHON ighi nacre ceseneeceedy abe e a 2 42
278. ng the ignition The Intelligent Key system warning light in the The Intelligent Key is not in If the Intelligent Key system warning light illuminates red even switch instrument panel illuminates red the vehicle while you are carrying the Intelligent Key the battery is completely discharged Replace the battery with a new one See Battery re placement in the Maintenance and do it yourself section Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 17 HOOD 4 Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel The hood will spring up slightly 2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood When closing the hood lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place 3 18 Pre driving checks and adjustments A WARNING Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving Fail ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment to avoid injury do not open the hood TRUNK LID AWARNING Do not drive with the trunk lid open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See Ex haust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in jured
279. ng to drive your NISSAN ve hicle in another country you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi cle s engine Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline There fore avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country state province or district it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis sion control and safety standards vary according to the country state province or district there fore vehicle specifications may differ When any vehicle is to be taken into an other country state province or district and registered its modifications transpor tation and registration are the responsibil ity of the user NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION WT10171 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN PLATE The vehicle identification number VIN plate is attached as shown This number is the identifica tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER chassis number The vehicle identification number is located as shown Technical and consumer information 9 9 eee l WT10172 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F M V S S C M V S S
280. ni cal and consumer information section of this manual for wheel off set dimensions When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning e The use of retread tires is not recommended For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life Even with regular use wheels can get out of balance Therefore they should be bal anced as required Wheel balance service should be per formed with the wheels off the vehicle Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Infor mation Canada in the Warranty In formation Booklet Car
281. ning system checked by a NISSAN dealer A WARNING Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on Driv ing could be dangerous If you judge it to be safe drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs Otherwise have your vehicle towed because driv ing it could be dangerous e Pressing the brake pedal with the en gine stopped and or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer Charge warning light If this light comes on while the engine Is running it may indicate the charging system Is not func tioning properly Turn the engine off and check the generator belt If the belt is loose broken missing or if the light remains on see a NISSAN dealer immediately A CAUTION Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose broken or missing Door open warning light This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key Is in the ON position Engine oil pressure warning light This light warns of low engine oil pressure If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving pull off the road in a safe area stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized
282. nock Index number Research oc tane number 96 If unleaded premium gasoline is not available you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number Research octane number 91 but you may notice a decrease in performance A CAUTION Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty For additional information see Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL Engine oil with API Certification Mark Viscosity SAE 5W 30 See Engine oil and oil filter recommendation in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual TIRE COLD PRESSURE See tire placard RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK IN PROCEDURE During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km of vehicle use follow the recommendations outlined in the BREAK IN SCHEDULE information found in the Starting and driving section of this manual Follow these recommendations for the future re liability and economy of your new vehicle
283. ns The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged CHILD SAFETY Children need adults to help protect them They need to be properly restrained In addition to the general information in this manual child safety information is available from many other sources including doctors teachers government traffic safety offices and community organizations Every child is different so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child There are three basic types of child restraint systems Rear facing child restraint Front facing child restraint Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child s size Generally infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 pounds 9 kg should be placed in rear facing child restraints Front facing child re straints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a front facing child restraint A WARNING Infants and children need special protec tion The vehicle s seat belts may not fit them properly The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones In an accident an improperly fit ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury Always use appropriate child restraints All U S states and Canadian provinces or terri tories require the use of a
284. ns and release when the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button complete the following 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 3 Press and hold the hand held transmitter button 4 The HomeLink indicator light will flash first slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly release both buttons The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen you should change the codes of any non rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink Consult the Owner s Manual of each device or call the manu facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information When your vehicle is recovered you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information FCC Notice This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subj
285. ns is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch Opening any door Pushing the ignition switch Inserting the mechanical key into the ignition switch The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow ing operations Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 11 Turning the ignition switch to the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the remote controller Switching the room light switch to the OFF position 3 12 Pre driving checks and adjustments Opening the trunk lid 1 Push the trunk opener request switch for more than 1 second while carrying the Intel ligent Key with you 2 The trunk will unlatch A chime will sound four times 3 Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci dentally locked in the trunk lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will open HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33
286. ntain your NIS SAN s good mechanical condition as well as its emission and engine performance It is the owner s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance as well as general maintenance Is performed As the vehicle owner you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance You are a vital link in the mainte nance chain Scheduled maintenance For your convenience both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance Is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals General maintenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day to day op eration They are essential for proper vehicle op eration It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed 8 2 Maintenance and do it yourself Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools These checks or inspections can be done by you a qualified technician or if you prefer a NISSAN dealer Where to go for service If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN technicians are well trained specialists who are kept up to date with the latest ser
287. ntelligent Key e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 7 Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C e Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli gent Key from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact a NISSAN dealer 3 8 Pre driving checks and adjustments OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch 4 When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat ing location the Intelligent Key system s operat ing range becomes narrower and the Intelligent Key may not function properly The operating range is within 31 50 in 80 cm from each request switch If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass handle or rear bumper the request switches may not function When the Intelligent Key is
288. ntelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers Sy SPA1951 Mechanical key The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key which can be used in case of a discharged bat tery To remove the mechanical key release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key To install the mechanical key firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position The mechanical key can be used for operation in the same way as an ordinary key A CAUTION Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot Valet hand off When you have to leave a key with a valet give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me chanical key with you to protect your belongings To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being opened during valet hand off follow the proce dures below 1 Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF position 2 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key 3 Lock the glove box and the trunk pass through with the mechanical key 4 Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you See Trunk lid later in this section Storage in the Instruments and controls section and Seats in the Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your
289. number of layers or plies of rubber coated fabric in the tire Tire manufactur ers also must indicate the materials in the tire which include steel nylon polyester and others 4 Maximum permissible inflation pres sure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire Do not exceed the maximum permissible in flation pressure Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car ried by the tire When replacing the tires on the vehicle always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory in stalled tire Term of tubeless or tube type Indicates whether the tire requires an in ner tube tube type or not tubeless T The word radial The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown Other Tire related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section Intended Outboard Sidewall is 1 the sidewall that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire or 2 the out ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle TYPES OF TIRES A WARNING Whe
290. o Spanish in Spanish or French in French Use the following chart to select the language NOTE Note You must press the f lt button or the MODE button within 5 seconds to change the language Current language MODE Press ama PHONE SEND PHONE END to select to select Press 4 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 47 5 If you decide not to change the language do not press either button After 5 seconds the VR session will end and the language will not be changed Pairing procedure NOTE The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure the procedure will be cancelled Main Menu Setup A Pair phone New phone Initiate from handset Name phone Assign priority Choose ringtone 1 Press the 4 button on the steering wheel The system announces the available commands 2 Say Setup The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands Say Pair phone The system acknowl edges the command and announces the next set of available commands Say New phone The system acknowl edges the command and asks you to initiate pairing from the phone handset The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model See the cellular phone Owner s Manual
291. o not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels Appearance and care 7 3 e Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot The wheel temperature should be the same as am bient temperature Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub ber If a tire dressing is applied to the tires it may react with the coating and form a compound This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint If you choose to use a tire dressing take the following precautions e Use a water based tire dressing The coat ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an oil based tire dressing 7 4 Appearance and care Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread grooves where it would be difficult to remove Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel Make sure the tire dressing is com pletely removed from the tire tread grooves Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom mended by tire dressing manufacturer CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim plastic parts and seats
292. o the side of the road ina safe area Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal anced as described earlier in this section Be careful when passing other vehicles Passing while towing a trailer requires con siderably more distance than normal pass ing Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes Down shift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance do not use overdrive Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently This could cause the brakes to overheat resulting in reduced braking efficiency Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer Anticipate stops and brake gradually Do not use cruise control while towing a trailer Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers Obey the local speed limits Check your hitch trailer wiring harness con nections and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles 80 km of travel and at every break When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather put the vehicle in the P Park position When launching a boat don t allow the wa ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear b
293. o the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 83 ft lb 112 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tight ened to specifications at all times It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval AWARNING After rotating the tires check and adjust the tire pressure Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc e Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet ap 2 Wear indicator Location mark Tire wear and damage AWARNING Tires should be periodically in spected for wear cracking bulg ing or objects caught in the tread If excessive wear cracks bulging or deep cuts are found the tire s should be replaced The original tires have built in tread wear indicators When the wear indicators are visible the tire s should be replaced Tires degrade with age and use Have tires including the spare over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be ob vious Replace the tires as neces sary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal in jury If i
294. oad rating to the original equipment tires If you do not it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Generally snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never ex ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire If you install snow tires they must be the same size brand construction and tread pattern on all four wheels For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 39 studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires TIRE CHAINS A CAUTION Tire chains cables should not be installed on P245 45R18 size tires Installation of the tire chains cables on P245 45R18 size tires will cause damage to the vehicle If you plan to use tire chains cables you should install P225 55R17 size tires on your vehicle Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location Check the local laws before installing tire chains When installing tire chains make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer s suggestions Use only SAE class S chains Class S chains are used on vehicles with restricted ti
295. occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pres sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors A CAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts antenna etc on the windows This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors and the TPMS will not function properly Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu minate Some examples are Facilities or electric devices using
296. od This can discharge the battery NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key If the engine fails to start using a registered key for example when interference is caused by another registered key an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the following pro cedures 1 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 2 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 sec onds 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs NISSAN rec ommends placing the registered key on a sepa rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices Starting and driving 5 7 BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear Check fluid levels such as engine oil cool ant brake fluid and window washer fluid as frequently as possible or at least whenever you refuel Check that all windows and lights are clean Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition Also check tires for proper inflation Lock all doors Position seat and adjust head restraints Adjust inside and outside mirrors Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
297. off after a few driving trips If the ENGINE light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer e For additional information see the Malfunction indicator light MIL in the Instruments and Controls section earlier in this manual 3 22 Pre driving checks and adjustments TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident A CAUTION Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort The driv er s air bag inflates with great force If you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of position in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel Always use the seat belts AUTOMATIC OPERATION if so equipped Tilt operation Push the switch to adjust the steering wheel up or down 2 to the desired position Entry Exit function The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically when the driver s door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK position This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily The st
298. oice commands correctly Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command Otherwise the command will not be received properly Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition press and release the 4 4 button located on the steering wheel The light on the overhead con sole flashes to signal you have entered a voice recognition VR session After the tone sounds speak a command Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 45 The command given is picked up by the micro phone and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again say Help and the system will repeat them If a command is not recognized the system announces Command not recognized Please try again Repeat the command ina clear voice If you want to go back to the previous com mand you can say Go back or Correc tion any time the system is waiting for a response You can cancel a command when the sys tem is waiting for a response by saying Cancel or Quit The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session You can also press the MQPE button on the steering wheel at any time Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the
299. oil type is used and main tenance intervals are followed Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature Because of this it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper ated before the next oil change Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high quality genuine NISSAN oil filter When re placing use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor rect oil and filter quality and or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war ranty Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built You do not have to change Technical and consumer information 9 5 the oil before the first recommended change interval Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle Operation
300. om of the steering wheel with one hand Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go Make small corrections and back up slowly If possible have someone guide you when you are backing up Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking Parking on a slope is not recommended however if you must do so A CAUTION If you move the shift selector lever to the P Park position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake transmission damage could occur 1 2 4 5 6 Apply and hold the brake pedal Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels After the wheel blocks are in place slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks ab sorb the vehicle load Apply the parking brake Shift the transmission into P Park Turn off the engine To drive away 1 9 22 Technical and consumer information Start the vehicle O A O N Apply and hold the brake pedal Shift the transmission into gear Release the parking brake Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks 6 Apply and hold the brake pedal 7 Have someone retrieve and store the blocks When going down a hill shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect When going up a long grade downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine over loading and or overheating If t
301. ompatible auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack Volume control switch Push the volume control switch up or down to increase or decrease the volume Tuning Memory change radio Push the tuning switch W or 4N forless than 1 5 seconds to change presets Seek tuning radio Push the tuning switch W or AN for more than 1 5 seconds to seek the next or previ ous radio station 4 42 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Next Previous track CD Push the tuning switth W or 7S for less than 1 5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present track or skip to the next track Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks Change disc CD if so equipped Push the SEEK tuning switch W or AN for more than 1 5 seconds to change the playing disc up or down ANTENNA Window antenna The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window A CAUTION Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it This may cause poor recep tion or noise When cleaning the inside of the rear window be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN be sure to observe the following precautions otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other elec
302. on most trailer couplers Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1 16 smaller than the hole in the ball mount The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut Technical and consumer information 9 19 Ball mount The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight Additionally the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground Sway control device Sudden maneuvers wind gusts and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han dling Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects If you choose to use one contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle hitch trailer and the trailer s brake sys tem Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device Class hitch Class trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum wei
303. on key to the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the traction control system TCS is operational If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica tor light while you are driving have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer While the traction control system is operating you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerat ing but this is normal The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated Turn signal hazard indicator lights Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light if so equipped This indicator light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF This indicates the vehicle dynamic control system is not operating Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally See Vehicle dynamic control VDC system in the Starting and driving section of this manual The vehicle dynamic control light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light while you are driving have the vehicle dynamic control system checked by a NISSAN dealer While the vehicle dynamic control system is op erating y
304. operly See Precau tions on Seat Belt Usage later in this section After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 1 2 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT PASSENGER S SIDE Forward and backward Reclining Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the To recline the seatback pull the lever up and lean seat forward or backward to the desired position back To bring the seatback forward pull the lever Release the lever to lock the seat in position up and lean your body forward Release the lever to lock the seatback in position The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 3 FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT for driver s seat and if so equipped for passenger s seat Operating tips The power seat motor has an auto reset overload protection circuit If the motor stops during operation wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch
305. operly the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud den stop SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE e To clean the seat belt webbing apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors the seat belts may retract slowly Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean dry cloth Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles tongues retractors flexible wires and anchors work properly If loose parts deterioration cuts or other damage on the webbing is found the entire seat belt as sembly should be replaced Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 17 CHILD RESTRAINTS PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS A WARNING Infants and small children should al ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle Failure to use a child restraint can re sult in serious injury or death Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle Also do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself 1 18 Safety
306. osal of vehicle fluid This Maintenance and do it yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail able See Owner s Manual Service Manual or der information in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions and could affect warranty coverage If in doubt about any servicing have it done by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 5 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS ease rp ml Cana S Tay Va a HER R K N LOT I eZ 8 6 Maintenance and do it yourself el a 9 12 Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Air cleaner Battery Fuse Fusible link box Engine oil dipstick Radiator cap Drive belt location Fuse block Windshield washer fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir NOTE Engine cover removed for clarity ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant to provide year round anti freeze and coolant protection The anti freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary A WARNING Never remove the radiator or coolant
307. osal procedures could cause personal injury The front seat pre tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the supplemental air bag systems Working with the seat belt retrac tor it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions helping to restrain front seat occupants The pre tensioner is encased with the seat belt s retractor These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts When the pre tensioner seat belt activates smoke is released and aloud noise may be heard This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly After the pre tensioner seat belts have activated load limiters allow the seat belt to release web bing if necessary to reduce forces against the chest If any abnormality occurs in the pre tensioner system the supplemental air bag warning light amp will not come on will flash intermit tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or START position In this case the pre tensioner seat belt may not function properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the pre tensioner seat belt system and guide the
308. osition adjustment and Outside mirrors earlier in this section During this step do not turn the ignition to any position other than ON 4 Push the SET switch and within 5 seconds push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at least 1 second The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch After the indicator light goes off the se lected positions are stored in the selected memory 1 or 2 If anew memory is stored in the same memory switch the previous memory will be deleted Linking a keyfob to a stored memory position Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory position memory switch 1 or 2 with the follow ing procedure 1 Follow the steps for storing a memory posi tion 2 While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec onds press the button on the keyfob The indicator light will blink After the indica tor light goes off the keyfob is linked to that memory setting With the key removed from the ignition switch press the button on the keyfob The driv er s seat and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position NOTE If a new memory position is saved to the memory switch the keyfob automatically re links Procedure for storing the outside mirror positions for best visibility when backing up An outside mirror position for backing up can be stored for each memor
309. other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds If the tires are used at speeds above 100 mph 162 km h where it is legal to do so on a race track for example the cold tire inflation pressure must be increased Re fer to Checking tire pressure later in this section Set the tire pressure to the normal cold tire inflation pressure when the vehicle speed or load is reduced Incorrect tire pressure including un der inflation may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling AWARNING Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is located on the F M V S S C M V S S label The vehicle weight capacity is indi cated on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped Do not load your ve hicle beyond this capacity Over loading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life unsafe operat ing conditions due to premature tire failure or unfavorable han dling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident Loading beyond the specified ca pacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components Before taking a long trip or whenever you heavily load your vehicle use a tire pressure gauge to ensure
310. ou might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or ac celerating but this is normal Instruments and controls 2 15 AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings When a disc brake pad requires replacement it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver s door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle Light reminder chime With the ignition switch in the OFF position a chime sounds when the driver s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on Turn the headlight control switch off before leav ing the vehicle Intelligent Key door buzzer The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one of the following improper operations is found The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors 2 16 Instruments and controls Any doors are not closed securely when locking the doors When the buzzer sounds be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See Intelli gent Key system in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section SECURITY SYSTEMS LICO301 Your vehicle has two types of security systems Vehicle s
311. oving The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as pos sible around the hips not the waist Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never run the lap shoulder belt over your abdominal area Contact your doctor for specific recommendations INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts Check with your doctor for specific recommendations THREE POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR A WARNING Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly 1 14 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0174 Manual front seat shown Fastening the seat belts Q Adjust the seat See Seats earlier in this section 2 Slowly pull the seat belt out
312. ower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System LATCH compat ible child restraints This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system With this system you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating posi tions only Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH anchors WRS0700 LATCH lower anchor location LATCH lower anchor point locations The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback A label is at tached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH anchors A WARNING Attach LATCH compatible child re straints only at the locations shown in the illustration If a child restraint is not secured properly your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident 1 20 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH anchors The child restraint will not be secured properly Child restraint anchor points are de signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re straints Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses LRSO661 LATCH webbing mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH anchor attachments LATCH compatible child
313. part Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety preserve your warranty pro tection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle And if your vehicle was leased using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident Non genuine imitation parts may not provide such built in safeguards Also non genuine parts of ten show premature wear rust and corrosion Technical and consumer information 9 27 Why should you take a chance In over 40 states the law says you must be advised if non genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authoriz ing the use of non genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty These laws help pro tect you so you can take action to protect your self It s your right If you should need further information visit us at www nissanusa com for U S customers or www nissan ca for Canadian customers 9 28 Technical and consumer information 10 Index A Active Head Restraint 1 9 Air bag See supplemental restraint SVS hac ke oe es ke ae 1 37 Air bag system Front See supplemental front impact airbagsystem 04 1 44 Air bag warning light 1 52 2
314. ping or screech ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard Under some driving or climate conditions occa sional brake squeak squeal or other noise may be heard Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed For more information regarding brake inspections see the appropriate mainte nance schedule information in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide FUSES n aly al Two types of fuses are used Type A is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment Type B is used in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com partment and passenger compartment fuse boxes If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration This will not affect the performance of the fuse Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under hood fuse boxes Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes ENGINE COMPARTMENT CAUTION Never use a f
315. placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com puter When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter In such cases correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions the battery s life is approximately 2 years If the battery is dis charged replace it with a new one When the Intelligent Key battery is low the Intel ligent Key system warning light _ will blink green for about 30 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves such as sig nals from a TV and personal computer the bat tery life may become shorter For information regarding replacement of a bat tery see Battery in the Maintenance and do it yourself section As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys contact a NISSAN dealer A CAUTION Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the Intelligent Key Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not change or modify the I
316. placing spark plugs 22 00 5 8 15 PUP CICANels soc E geet eesctteeseeseueace 8 16 In cabin microfilter ci decaet dew eeddewenneene eee 8 16 Windshield wiper blades 0 02 005 8 19 CIGAN sia lt certetsrgnesesenpansenvexuer betes 8 19 IReDIGCING 2 g2c ancaevcue soem ets eee oa ease seats 8 19 Drako lt enaucciegaceceeeedenns bad eet eceeeeedceend 8 20 Self adjusting brakes 0 cece eee eee 8 20 Brake pad wear indicators 0eee seen 8 20 USCS E E E E A ences 8 21 Engine COMPAUMEM csceseceeaees deedueeeve cue 8 21 Passenger compartment 0 eee eens 8 23 Battery replacement 0 00 c cece eee eens 8 24 Intelligent Key battery 005 8 24 DIGMIS 4mssus oh 24Gekeeus eas eaversan eee E 8 25 PICHGUGNIS eect ccedGerencetetecaraed neeedecd at 8 25 Exterior and interior lights 8 27 Wheels and tireS crest escaedceasededaeade sees desdees 8 32 Tire PICSSUWG yu 206sist cues sear cue eewwersaetans 8 32 Tire labeling seco aeneeeeeeeew ees ieta ot peconeeee 8 36 Types of UheSnt o244 c0 regra wbsena ns 8 39 Tire Cha es secu aan ose eee nc entesesk AEE A 8 40 Changing wheels and tires 00000 8 40 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money However some day to day and regular maintenance is essential to mai
317. play Once you have selected a zone number the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds ee Tm ac DE m VSS Inaccurate compass direction The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function If the correct direction is not shown follow this procedure 1 With the display turned on press and hold the switch for about 9 seconds The display will read C instruments and controls 2 7 2 Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 MPH 8 km h 3 After completing the circles the display should return to normal f the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment have the compass checked at an authorized dealer The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill The compass returns to the correct compass point when the ve hicle moves to an area where the geomag netism is stabilized A CAUTION Do not install a ski rack antenna etc which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet They affect the op eration of the compass When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing 2 8 Instruments and controls WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
318. played MP3 display mode To change the text displayed when listening to an MP3 with MP3 text when CD with text is being used press the DISP button The DISP button will scroll through the CD text as follows Folder title Artist name Track title Folder title Artist name Track title To change the default display mode press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE appears on the display then rotate the knob to select the following display modes Disc number Folder number Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 37 Once a display mode is selected press the AU DIO knob again to store the setting Folder number mode displays the folder number and the file number of the folder currently being played Disc number mode displays the number se lected disc and the track that is currently being played Display satellite radio display mode if so equipped To change the text displayed when listening to satellite radio if so equipped press the DISP button The DISP button will scroll through the broadcast information as follows Name lt Title Current display mode To change the default display mode press the AUDIO button to display mode and press the TUNE button to select the following display modes Channel number gt Channel name Name lt Title Once the display mode is selected press the AUDIO button again to store the setting If th
319. pproved child restraints for infants and small children See Child Re straints later in this section Also there are other types of child restraints available for larger children for additional protec tion NISSAN recommends that all pre teens and children be restrained in the rear seat According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys tem Air bag system for the front passen ger See Supplemental restraint system later in this section Infants Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint NISSAN recom mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu facturer s instructions for installation and use Small Children Children that are over one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg can be placed in a forward Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system facing child restraint Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations NISSAN recom mends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor
320. ption is active Satellite radio can only be installed in vehicles that were factory pre wired for satellite radio Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If satellite radio is not operational then the RADIO button is used to toggle between AM and FM bands If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception lt van TUNE tuning button To manually tune the radio press the TUNE button or gt To move quickly oe the channels press and hold either the gt button i CI SEEK tuning button Press the SEEK button M or gt l for less than 1 5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broad casting station Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 31 SCAN tuning button Press the SCAN button to stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds Pressing the button again during this 5 second period will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station Ifthe A SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station PRESET A B C Station memory opera tions 18 stations can be set for the FM
321. quently when driving conditions require an increased amount of win dow washer fluid Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Anti freeze or equivalent A CAUTION Do not substitute engine anti freeze coolant for window washer solution This may result in damage to the paint Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser voir tank e Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen trate and water BATTERY Keep the battery surface clean and dry When working on or near a battery al Clean the battery with a solution of baking ways wear suitable eye protection and soda and water remove all jewelry Make certain the terminal connections are Battery posts terminals and related ac f clean and securely tightened cessories contain lead and lead com Ifthe vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or eee Wu elites Ea eek longer disconnect the negative battery e Keep battery out of the reach of terminal cable to prevent discharge children WARNING Do not expose the battery to flames or electrica
322. quest that you inform the buyer about the supplemental side air bag and curtain side impact air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual 1 50 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Pre tensioner seat belt system Front seats A WARNING The pre tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation It must be re placed together with the retractor and buckle as a unit If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre tensioner is not activated be sure to have the pre tensioner system checked and if nec essary replaced by your NISSAN dealer No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre tensioner seat belt system This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre tensioner seat belt operation Tampering with the pre tensioner seat belt system may result in serious per sonal injury Work around and on the pre tensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pre tensioner seat belt system If you need to dispose of the pre tensioner or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Correct pre tensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual Incorrect disp
323. r an open circuit in the electrical system Have the system repaired promptly instruments and controls 2 9 WARNING LIGHTS or Anti lock Braking ABS Ac Fi warning light When the ignition switch is in the ON position the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off This indicates the ABS is operational If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer If an ABS malfunction occurs the anti lock func tion is turned off The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance See Brake system in the Starting and driving sec tion or Brake warning light This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems Parking brake indicator When the ignition key is in the ON position the light comes on when the parking brake is applied 2 10 Instruments and controls Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition key is in the ON position the light warns of a low brake fluid level If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied stop the vehicle and perform the following 1 Check the brake fluid level Add brake fluid as necessary See Brake fluid in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual 2 If the brake fluid level is correct have the war
324. r damaged Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water Inside flanges seams and folds on the doors hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt Therefore these areas must be cleaned regularly Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance Polishing is recommended to remove built up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re applying wax A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash ing Follow the instructions supplied with the wax Do not use a wax containing any abrasives cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish Machine compounding or aggressive polishing ona base coat clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots industrial dust insects and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter it is necessary to clean the underbody re
325. r with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle 3 Slide the filter into the housing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 17 NOTE Make sure the filter sits on top of the 2 supporting tabs on the housing CORRECT INSTALLATION INCORRECT INSTALLATION 4 Replace the cover by inserting the upper tabs inside the housing slot and pushing the hook tabs until they snap on to the housing lip 5 Install the glove box door e Cee Yy ES e es La el A E A 6 Fill out the date information on the small ZAA replacement label and attach it to the glove box lid SUPPORTING TABS ON HOUSING SUPPORTING TABS ON HOUSING INTERFERES WITH RECIRCULATION DOOR A gt A MICRO FILTER L Housing Housing 8 18 Maintenance and do it yourself WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent Then rinse the blades with clear water If your wind shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper replace the blades A CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can dam age
326. re to vehicle clearance Vehicles that can use Class S chains are de signed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device tire chains or cables The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires Other types may damage your vehicle Use chain tensioners when 8 40 Maintenance and do it yourself recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the pos sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains In addition drive at a reduced speed Otherwise your vehicle may be damaged and or vehicle handling and perfor mance may be adversely affected Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire Do not use tire chains on dry roads Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress WD10258 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7 500 miles 12 000 km See Flat tire in the In case of emer gency section of this manual for tire re placing procedures As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts t
327. rescrip tion or over the counter drugs which may cause drowsiness Always wear your seat belt as out lined in the Safety Seats seat belts and supple mental restraint system section of this manual and also instruct your passengers to do so Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers In a rollover crash an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt DRINKING ALCOHOL DRUGS AND DRIVING A WARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs Alcohol in the bloodstream re duces coordination delays reaction time and impairs judgement Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others Additionally if you are injured in an accident alcohol can increase the severity of the injury NISSAN is committed to safe driving However you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents Al though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol Remember drinking and driving don t mix And that is true for drugs too over the counter pre scription and illegal drugs Don t drive if your ability to operate your ve
328. reservoir cap when the engine is hot Wait until the engine and radiator cool down Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator See precautions in If your vehicle overheats found in the In case of emergency section of this manual The radiator is equipped with a pres sure type radiator cap To prevent en gine damage use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap A CAUTION When adding or replacing coolant be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant green or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50 anti freeze and 50 demineralized or distilled water The use of other types of coolant solutions or coolant colors such as or ange may damage the engine cooling system Demineral ized or dis tilled water Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Outside temperature down to Coolant or equivalent CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold If the coolant level is below the MIN level add coolant to the MAX level If the reservoir is empty check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level If the cooling system frequently requires coolant have it checked by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 7
329. ressed NOTE If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the Intelligent Key the mode will not be changed with the display Use the Intelligent Key to return to the previous mode and re enable the display control Auto re lock time Select to set the length of time before doors automatically re lock Sensitivity of automatic headlights Select to change the sensitivity setting of the automatic headlights Lower less sensitive automatic headlights will take longer to come on when the head light sensor senses less ambient light Higher more sensitive automatic headlights will come on quicker when the headlight sensor senses less ambient light Automatic headlights off delay Select to change the setting for the length of time the automatic headlights remain on after exiting the vehicle Speed dependent wiper Select to turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper function Intelligent Key lock response sound Se lect to change the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when a request switch is pushed to lock the doors Select to turn off all sounds made when a request switch is pushed to lock the doors by selecting the OFF key using the joystick Intelligent Key unlock response beep sound Select to turn on or turn off the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when a request switch is pushed to unlock the doors Intelligent Key lock unlock function Sele
330. restraints include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle With this sys tem you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint Check your child re straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH This information may also be in the in structions provided by the child restraint manu facturer LRS0662 LATCH rigid mounted attachment LATCH child restraints generally require the use of a top tether strap See Top tether strap child restraint later in this section for installation in structions When installing a child restraint carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint See Child restraint installation using LATCH in this section Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires the use of atop tether strap it must be secured to the anchor point A WARNING Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses 1 21 LRSO243 5 passenger models Top Tether Anchor Point Locations Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf LRS0296 4 passenger models Installing top
331. result in accidents fire or electrical shock Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality such as a frozen screen or lack of sound Continued use of the system may result in accident fire or electric shock In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware spill liquid on it or notice smoke or smell coming from it stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents fire or electrical shock 4 2 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 1 TRIP INFO button P 4 3 2 CLOCK DISP button P 4 5 3 AUDIO button P 4 5 When you use this system make sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition ON or ACC for a long time it will use up all the battery power and the engine will not start Reference symbols TRIP INFO button This is a button on the control panel By pressing this button you can select the item or perform this action HOW TO USE THE TRIP INFO BUTTON When the TRIP INFO button is pressed the following modes will display on the screen Dist to Empty Average Speed Fuel Economy Trip Time Audio or OFF Dist to Empty Emp fe WHAO701 Distance to empty MI or km The Distance To Empty DTE mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The DTE is constantly c
332. rformance MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control Push the fan control button control the fan speed to manually Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed Air recirculation Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle The indicator light on the button will come on The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode Air flow control Pushing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet o Air flows from center and side ventilators 74 Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets ps Air flows mainly from foot outlets i Air flows from defroster and foot outlets 7 Air flows from defroster outlets To turn system off Press the OFF button OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds However this is not a malfunction After the coolant tempera ture warms up air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally The sunload sensor located on the top passen ger side of the instrument panel helps the system maintain a constant temperature Do not put any thing on or around this sensor Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 21 SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER The
333. rom all discs will be played randomly 4 40 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 1 DISC RDM Tracks from the disc that is cur rently playing will be played randomly CD EJECT Current disc Press the amp button for less than 1 5 seconds Then press one of the CD select 1 6 buttons for the selected CD to be ejected If one of the CD select 1 6 buttons are not pressed within 1 5 seconds the current loaded CD will be ejected If the disc is not removed within 15 seconds the disc will reload All discs Press and hold the amp button for more than 1 5 seconds The compact discs will be ejected one by one If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds or the amp button is pressed again during the eject sequence the entire disc eject sequence will be can celed When this button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played CD IN indicator The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer in CD mode only a WHA0611 AUX jack if so equipped CD CARE AND CLEANING Type A The AUX jack 1 is located below the air condi Handle a CD by its edges Do not bend the la ene coniro S tioner controls The AUX audio input jack accepts disc Never touch the surface of the disc 2 MODE select switch any standard analog audio input such as from a Always place the discs in the s
334. rror will turn downward when the shift selector lever is moved to R Reverse For more information regarding this feature and how to save the R Reverse mirror tilt down adjustment in the automatic drive positioner memory refer to Automatic drive positioner later in this section Heated mirrors if so equipped The electric control type outside mirrors if so equipped can be heated to defrost defog or de ice for improved visibility Press the rear win dow defogger switch to activate the heating function Press the switch again to deactivate or the heating function will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes 3 28 Pre driving checks and adjustments AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER if so equipped The automatic drive positioner system has two features Memory storage function Enitry exit function MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION Two positions for the driver s seat steering col umn and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory Follow these procedures to use the memory system 1 Set the Continuously Variable Transmission CVT selector lever to the P Park position 2 Turn the ignition ON 3 Adjust the driver s seat steering column and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch For additional information see Seats in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section and Pedal p
335. runk access For models without rear center console the trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading as shown A Push down on the button on the rear parcel shelf 2 Fold down the passenger side seatback A WARNING e Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold down position Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci dent or sudden stop The 4 passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats Never use the rear console as a seating position or for a child restraint 1 6 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi tion If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in jured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent
336. s To change the SSV mode to OFF LOW MID or HIGH turn the Tuning knob to the right or left Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears Other wise the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds DISP display button The DISP display button will show text about FM stations CD or MP3 and SAT satellite if so equipped information in the audio display FM display mode To change the text displayed while listening to an FM station that broadcasts with Radio Data Sys tem RDS press the DISP button The DISP button will allow you to change RDS information as follows Station call number Program type Station information Station call number Station call number displays the radio fre quency number of the station Program type displays the type or category of radio station Station information displays information the radio station wants to broadcast For additional information see Radio data sys tem RDS later in this section CD display mode To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text press the DISP button The DISP button will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows Disc title Track title Disc title Track title Track title mode displays the title of the se lected CD track Disc title mode displays the title of the CD being
337. s NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives for example fuel injec tor cleaner octane booster intake valve deposit removers etc which are sold commercially Many of these additives intended for gum varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent heavy spark knock Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise If se vere this can lead to engine damage If you 9 4 Technical and consumer information detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle for which NISSAN is not responsible Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock after run and or overheating which may cause excessive fuel Consumption or engine damage If any of the above symptoms are en countered have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer However now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills This is nota cause for concern because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load A
338. s 2 43 REAR To turn on both personal reading lights press the switch tothe sy position Q To turn the lights off return the switch to the center position To turn on a single personal reading light press the switch to the 2 position To turn a single personal reading light off return the switch to the center position 2 44 Instruments and controls TRUNK LIGHT The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened When the trunk lid is closed the light goes off The light will go off after about 30 minutes if the trunk lid is left open unless the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position For bulb replacement procedures refer to Exte rior and interior lights in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand held transmitters into one built in device HomeLink Universal Transceiver Will operate most Radio Frequency RF devices such as garage doors gates home and office lighting entry door locks and se curity systems Is powered by your vehicle s battery No separate batteries are required If the vehi cle s battery is discharged or is discon nected HomeLink will retain all program ming Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed retain the original trans mitter for future programming pro
339. seating position or for a child restraint The instructions in this section apply to child restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seat or the front passenger seat WRS0699 Front facing front passenger seat step 1 Front facing Follow these steps to install a front facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat it should be placed in a front facing direction only Move the seat to the rearmost position Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system A child restraint can only be installed in the rear center position of 5 passenger models Do not attempt to install a child restraint on the rear console of the 4 passenger model 2 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit See Head restraint adjust ment in this section If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed If the seating position does not have an adjustable hea
340. secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low Load the trailer so approximately 60 of the trailer load is in the front half and 40 is in the back half Also make sure the load is balanced side to side Check your hitch trailer tire pressure ve hicle tire pressure trailer light operation and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal state or local regulations If not install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle s behavior you should practice turning stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic Steering stability and braking perfor mance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert ently becoming unlatched e Avoid abrupt starts acceleration or stops Avoid sharp turns or lane changes Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed Technical and consumer information 9 21 When backing up hold the bott
341. see a NISSAN dealer or contact Resolve Corporation 20770 Westwood Drive Strongsville OH 44149 1 800 247 5321 For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals for this model year and prior see a NISSAN dealer or contact Resolve Corporation 20770 Westwood Drive Strongsville OH 44149 1 800 247 5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser vice Manual or Owner s Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer For the phone num ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1 800 387 0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa tive will assist you Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and Owner s Manuals for older NISSAN models IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION Unfortunately accidents do occur In this unlikely event there is some important information you should know Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non genuine collision parts in order to cut costs among other reasons Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN collision parts If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to NISSAN s original exacting specifica tions if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value the solution is simple Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts NISSAN does not warrant non NISSAN parts nor does NISSAN s warranty apply to damage caused by a non genuine
342. side INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM A WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect elec tric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse The operating environment and or conditions may af fect the Intelligent Key system operation Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system A CAUTION Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves The Intel ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted such as a TV tower power station and broadcasting station When in possession of wireless equipment such as a cellular telephone transceiver and CB radio When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby When the Intelligent Key is
343. side of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the SAT band option is selected unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM or SIRIUS satellite radio service subscription is active Sat ellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal If possible do not put cargo over the satellite antenna COMPACT AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 23 Compact disc CD player A CAUTION Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot This could damage the CD and or CD changer player Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and or CD changer e Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time Only use high quality 4 7 inches 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the hu midity If this occurs remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely e The player may skip while driving on rough roads The CD player sometimes cannot func tion when the compartment tempera ture is extremely high or low De
344. simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held transmitter but ton DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed Instruments and controls 2 45 4 Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes changing from a slow blink to a rapidly flashing blink This could take up to 90 seconds When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapidly flash ing light indicates successful programming To activate the garage door or other pro grammed device press and hold the pro grammed HomeLink button releasing when the device begins to activate 5 If the indicator light on the HomeLink blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid HomeLink has picked up a rolling code garage door opener signal You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another per son for convenience 6 Press and release the smart or learn pro gram button located on the garage door opener s motor to activate the training mode This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor If the wire originates from under a light lens you will need to remove the lens to access the program button 2 46 Instruments and controls NOTE Once you have pressed and released the program butto
345. speak digits When prompted by the system say the number you wish to call Refer to How to say numbers and Making a call by entering a phone number earlier in this section for more details Redial Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed within the vehicle NOTE The system will not redial the last number dialed by the handset keypad The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a redial number does not exist the system announces There is no number to redial and ends the VR session Call back Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a call back number does not exist the system announces There is no number to call back and ends the VR session During a call During a call there are several command options available Press the 4 4 button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com mands Help The system announces the avail able commands Go back Correction The system an nounces Go back ends the VR session and returns to the call Cancel Quit The system announces Cancel ends the VR session and returns to the call Send Enter Call Dial Use the Send command to enter numbers during a call For e
346. ssen ger and cargo load in the vehicle Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be tween 10 15 of the trailer weight If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load Do not exceed the 10 15 tongue weight specification even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15 If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10 reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION UNIT Ib kg MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD 1 000 454 MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 100 45 TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer Canada only Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the ve hicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds rough road surfaces or passing trucks A WARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings Your vehicle may be ca pable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer The required hitch ball size is stamped
347. starter for more than 15 seconds at a time If the engine does not start turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again otherwise the starter could be damaged 4 Warm up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec onds after starting Do not race the engine while warming it up Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first especially in cold weather In cold weather keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 3 minutes before shutting it off Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start DRIVING THE VEHICLE CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT A WARNING e Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P Park or N Neu tral to R Reverse D Drive or manual shift mode Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed Fail ure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident e Cold engine idle speed is high so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of control Never shift to P Park or R Reverse while the vehicle is moving This could cause an accident A CAUTION When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade do not hold the vehicle by depress ing the accelerator pedal The foot brake should be used for this purpose The CVT in your vehicle is electronically
348. system If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback press the volume control switches or on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback You can also use the radio volume control knob How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands Refer to the following rules and examples Either zero or oh can be used for 0 Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh or One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh NOT One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred and NOT One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred Numbers can be spoken in small groups The system will prompt you to continue en tering digits if desired Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight oh oh 4 46 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more six six two The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more six two oh oh You can say Star for and Pound for at any time in any position of the phone num ber Example 1 555 1212 123 One five five five one two one two star one two three NOTE For
349. t belt to pre vent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident CAUTION Remember that a booster seat left in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the booster seat Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers When selecting any booster seat keep the following points in mind Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system Make sure the child s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat The seat back must be at or above the center of the child s ears For example if a 1 34 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system low back booster seat 1 is chosen the vehicle seat back must be at or above the center of the child s ears If the seat back is lower than the center of the child s ears a high back booster seat 2 should be used If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child Always follow all recommended pro cedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that i
350. t body may affect bulb performance Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed Only touch the plastic base when han dling the bulb Never touch the glass envelope Touching the glass could sig nificantly affect bulb life and or head light performance High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped Use the same number and wattage as Originally installed Low beam Wattage 55 Bulb no 9012 High beam Wattage 55 Bulb no 9012 Always check with the Parts Depart ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information 8 26 Maintenance and do it yourself EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Headlight assembly High low Halogen 55 9012 High low Xenon special D2S Day time running lamp 27 3156K Park Turn 27 8 4157NAK Cornering 27 3156K Front fog light H11 Front personal map lights a Console box illumination 194 Glove box light l 158 Vanity mirror light Step light 194 Rear personal lamps Rear console box light W5W High mounted stop light Type A W5W High mounted stop light Type B LED Trunk light 158 Rear combination light Tail Stop Turn 3057K Backup reversing 912 Sidemarker W5W License plate light 168 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information Maintenance and do it yourself 8 27 Headl
351. t is necessary to repair the spare tire contact a NISSAN dealer For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Maintenance and do it yourself 8 41 Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire use the same size tread design speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual A WARNING The use of tires other than those recom mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands construction bias bias belted or radial or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride braking handling ground clearance body to tire clearance tire chain clearance speedometer calibration headlight aim and bumper height Some of these ef fects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury 8 42 Maintenance and do it yourself If the wheels are changed for any rea son always replace with wheels which have the same off set dimension Wheels of a different off set could cause premature tire wear degrade ve hicle handling characteristics and or interference with the brake discs drums Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and or early brake pad shoe wear Re fer to Wheels and tires in the Tech
352. t re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Under these conditions the supplemental front air bag supplemental side air bags and curtain side impact air bag or pre tensioner seat belt systems may not operate properly It must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer 1 52 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system A WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the supplemental front air bag supplemental side air bag curtain side impact air bag systems and or pre tensioner seat belt systems will not operate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Repair and replacement procedure The supplemental front air bags supplemental side air bags curtain side impact air bags and pre tensioner seat belts are designed to inflate on a one time only basis As a reminder unless it is damaged the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has oc curred Repair and replacement of these supple mental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer When maintenance work is required on the ve hicle the supplemental front air bags supple mental side air bags curtain side impact air bags pre tensioner
353. t return to its normal operating condition have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary A WARNING When the high fluid temperature protec tion mode or fail safe operation occurs vehicle speed may be gradually reduced The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a collision Be especially care ful when driving If necessary pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal op eration or have it repaired if necessary PARKING BRAKE A WARNING Be sure the parking brake is fully re leased before driving Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake When parking be sure the parking brake is fully engaged e Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle They could release the parking brake and cause an accident WSD0169 To engage Pull the lever up To release 1 Firmly apply the foot brake 2 Move the shift selector lever to the P Park position 3 While pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly push the button and lower com pletely 4 Before driving be sure the brake warning light goes out Starting and driving 5 13 CRUISE CONTROL __ACCEL RES _COAST SET_ CANCEL ACCEL RES switch COAST SET switch CANCEL switch 4 ON
354. t ten sion It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section A WARNING When fastening the seat belts be certain that the seatbacks are completely se cured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop 1 15 Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the seat belt press the button on the buckle The seat belt automatically re tracts Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor When the vehicle slows down rapidly To increase your confidence in the seat belts check the operation as follows Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly The retractor should lock and re strict further belt movement If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera tion see a NISSAN dealer 1 16 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Om LRSO242 Shoulder belt height adjustment Front seats The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad justed to the position best for you See Precau tions on seat belt usage earlier in this section To adjust pull out the adjustment button Q and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position 2 so
355. tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and exces sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law A WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading ei ther separately or in combination can cause heat build up and possible tire failure EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties For USA 1 Emission Defects Warranty 2 Emissions Performance Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Informa tion Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a re placement by writing to Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties
356. tem switch is OFF The Slip indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected The ABS will still operate with the VDC system off When the VDC system is operating you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working prop erly The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction A WARNING The vehicle dynamic control system is designed to help improve driving stabil ity but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery sur faces and always drive carefully Starting and driving 5 21 If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not stan dard equipment or are extremely dete riorated the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly and the vehicle dynamic control off indica tor light may come on Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab sorbers struts springs stabilizer bars and bushings are not NISSAN approved for your vehic
357. temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating The trans mission high fluid temperature protection mode which helps reduce the chance of transmission damage could activate and automatically de crease engine power Under some conditions engine and vehicle speed could be reduced Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load weather and road conditions A WARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and lower vehicle speed Also when the high temperature mode oper ates engine and vehicle speed may be gradually reduced On highways the re duced speed may be lower than other traf fic which could increase the chance of a collision Be especially careful when driv ing If necessary pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the engine to cool or the transmission to return to normal operation A CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties Total trailer load Tongue load Tongue load x 100 10 to 15 Total trailer load Tongue load Keep the tongue load between 10 15 percent of the total trailer load within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following Towing Load Specification chart If the tongue load be comes excessive rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load Technical and consumer information 9 17 Gross axle weight T11012M Maximum Gross Veh
358. terrupted and or some abnormality detected Use the following reset procedure to return sunroof operation to normal 1 If the sunroof lid is open push the tilting switch repeatedly toward the DOWN posi tion to fully close the lid 2 Push and hold the tilting switch for more than 2 seconds toward the DOWN position to reestablish the lid s home position The sunroof should now operate normally 2 40 Instruments and controls Auto reverse function when closing or tilting down the sunroof The auto reverse function can be activated when the sunroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the sunroof oc curs A WARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the sunroof When closing If the control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it moves to the front the sunroof will immediately open backward When tilting down If the control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it tilts down the sunroof will immedi ately tilt up If the auto reverse function malfunctions a
359. that the tire pressures are at the specified level e Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH 137 km h unless it is equipped with high speed rated tires Driving faster than 85 MPH 137 km h may result in tire fail ure loss of control and possible injury Increase the cold tire inflation pressure as indicated in Check ing tire pressure later in this sec tion when using the tires speci fied by NISSAN above 100 MPH 162 km h where it is legal to do so on a race track for example Failure to increase the cold tire inflation pressure may result in tire failure loss of control and possible injury After such use readjust tire pressure For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Maintenance and do it yourself 8 33 Spare tire size if so equipped TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION PNEU ET INFORMATION DE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL FRONT REAR Se ousnevertaces rom X want X ammine X THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XX kg OR XX Ibs LE POIDS COMBINE D OCCUPANTS ET DE CARGAISON NE DEVRAIT JAMAIS EXC DER XX kg OU XX Ibs ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE VAILLE DU PNEU D ORIGINE TAILLE DU PNEU D ORIGINE pram meee Ai Avan P XXX XX R XX XXX kPa XX psi INFORMATION POUR D AUTRES PXXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX psi PANET S AU MAN
360. the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat If the passenger air bag status light will not illu minate even though you believe that the child restraint the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat in which case the air bag is OFF Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool However until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status For example if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system the supplemental air bag warning light 2 located in the meter and gauges area in the center of the instrument panel will blink Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer 1 47 1 48 Other supplemental front air bag precau tions A WARNING Do not place any objects on the steer ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel Also do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel Such ob jects may become dangerous projec tiles and cause
361. the LATCH anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cush ion material The child restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH an chors are obstructed Front facing Follow these steps to install a front facing child restraint using LATCH 1 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions LRS0663 Front facing web mounted step 2 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors 3 The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat back If necessary adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit See Head restraint adjustment in this section If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0664 Front facing rigid mounted step 2 interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child re straint 1 23 7 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 3 through 6 Rear facing Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using LATCH System 1 Position the child restraint on the seat
362. the belt passes over the center of the shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul der belt anchor into position A WARNING e After adjustment release the adjust ment button and try to move the shoul der belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you Failure to do so may reduce the effec tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If because of body size or driving position it is not possible to properly fit the lap shoulder belt and fasten it an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts The ex tender adds approximately 8 inches 200 mm of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position See a NISSAN dealer for assistance if an extender is required A WARNING Only NISSAN seat belt extenders made by the same company which made the Original equipment seat belts should be used with NISSAN seat belts Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints If the child restraint is not secured pr
363. the device dur ing the cycling process to prevent pos sible damage to the garage door opener components OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver once pro grammed may now be used to activate the ga rage door etc To operate simply press the ap propriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand held transmitter information replace the hand held transmitter batteries with new batteries position the hand held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface press and hold both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons without inter ruption position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds If HomeLink is not programmed within that time try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times If you continue to have programming difficulties please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared However to clear all programming press and hold the two outside butto
364. the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds unlock the door once and lock it again Even when the driver and or passen gers are in the vehicle the system will arm with all doors and trunk lid closed and locked with the ignition key in the OFF position Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently The alarm automatically turns off after ap proximately 50 seconds However the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver s door with the key a request switch or by pressing the button on the Intelligent Key Instruments and controls 2 17 The alarm is activated by opening the door or trunk lid without using the key a request switch or the Intelligent Key even if the door is unlocked by using the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch opening the trunk lid by operating the interior trunk lid release How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver s door with the key a request switch or by pressing the button on the Intelligent Key NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key If the engine fails to start using a registered key for example when interference is caused by another registered
365. the stop lights may not work Malfunction ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others Accelerator downshift in D Drive position and manual shift mode For passing or hill climbing depress the accel erator pedal to the floor This shifts the transmis sion down into lower range depending on the vehicle speed High fluid temperature protection mode This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode If the fluid temperature be comes too high for example when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads such as when towing a trailer engine power and under some conditions vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited Fail safe If the vehicle is driven under extreme con ditions such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking the fail safe system may be activated The MIL may come on to indicate the fail safe mode is activated see Malfunction indicator light MIL in the Instrument and controls sec tion This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly In this case turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds Then turn the switch back to the ON position The vehicle should return to its normal operat ing condition If it does no
366. themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 19 e Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling and or dehumidified heating AUTO This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically 1 Push the AUTO button on AUTO will be displayed 2 Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature Adjust the temperature display to about 75 F 24 C for normal operation The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con trolled automatically A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a malfunction 3 You can individually set driver and front pas senger side temperature using each tem perature control dial When the DUAL but ton or passenger side temperature di
367. they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses Adjustable seatbacks should be posi tioned to fit the child restraint but as upright as possible After attaching the child restraint test it before you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the LATCH attachment or by the seat belt path Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the re straint in place The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm If the restraint is not secure tighten the belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles When your child restraint is not in use keep it secured with the LATCH System or a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident A CAUTION Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system referred to as the Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System or LATCH Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors For details see the Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System LATCH later in this section If you do not have a LATC
368. tion indicator light 2 14 Manual front seat adjustment 1 2 Map pocket 6 ie 4s de oe oe bee amp 2 31 Meters and gauges aooaa a a 2 3 Instrument brightness control 2 25 Mirror Outside mirror control 3 26 Outside mirrors sak ee Bh aa 3 26 VANY IIOP 6 a sae ote oe Oa dees 3 24 N NISSAN vehicle immobilizer SyYS EM s a sor i Ee ww be ae 2 18 3 3 5 7 O Octane rating See fuel octane rating 9 4 Odometer s sa saisissait ea SES KS 2 4 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants aooaa ee es 9 2 Changing engine oil 8 9 Changing engine oilfilter 8 10 Checking engine oil level 8 8 Engine oil s e s sx btn aa doa aa mos 8 8 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation saaa aaa aae 9 5 Engine oil viscosity oaaae 9 5 Outside mirror control 3 26 Outside mirrors aooaa a 3 26 Overheat If your vehicle overheats 6 9 Owner s manual order form 9 27 Owner s manual service manual order INIOFMALON s s oe a aoe ew e Be eo Bow G 9 27 Pp Parking Parking brake operation 5 13 Parking parking onhills 5 17 Personal lights aoaaa 2 43 Phone Bluetooth hands free system 4 43 Power Power doorlocks si8asecaews 3 5 P wer outlet a ss 6 aa a a E 2 30 Power rear WINdOWS 2 38 Power steering fluid 8 11 Power steering system 5 18
369. to NISSAN with the information at For U S customers Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Pre driving checks and adjustments Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do it yourself Technical and consumer information 4 0 Illustrated table of contents Airbags seat belts and child restraints 0 2 SIMIC DaNeleteaeceuceser ecteurectecauceteuey sie 0 6 PXtGllOl MONE T IE ates tear acneesk ior ET 0 3 Engine compartment check locations 0 7 S o leolst ehaneennsce gauss E AE 0 4 Warming indicator lighis essri ssisecsss aeodunce seen ce 0 8 Passenger compartment ssssss aeran ee eee eee 0 5 AIRBAGS SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS Top tether strap anchor P 1 21 Rear head restraint P 1 8 Rear seat belts P 1 10 Supplemental curtain side impact air bag P 1 37 Supplemental side impact air bags P 1 37 6 Front head restraint P 1 8 P 1 9 7 Front seat belts P 1 10 8 Supple
370. torage case 3 POWER on off switch portable cassette tape player MP3 player or when they are not being used 4 Tuning switch laptop computers To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center Press the AUX button to play a compatible device to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do when it is plugged into the AUX jack not wipe the disc using a circular motion Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems 4 41 WHA0612 Type B Volume control switch Phone operation switch POWER on and MODE select switch 4 Tuning switch STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel POWER on off switch With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON position push the POWER switch to turn the audio system on or off oi If you have the Type B switch with the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON position push the MODE switch to turn the audio system on MODE select switch Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the following sequence Preset A Preset B Preset C CD AUX This mode is only available when a CD is loaded This mode is only available when a c
371. towing make sure that the trans mission axles steering system and powertrain are in working condition If any unit is damaged dollies must be used e Always attach safety chains before towing For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle RV refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual A CAUTION Never tow CVT models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground forward or backward as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission If it is nec essary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels When towing with the front wheels on towing dollies Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device Never secure the steering wheel by turning the ignition key to the LOCK position This may damage the steering lock mechanism Move the gearshift lever to the N Neutral position SCE0199A When towing CVT models with the rear TOWING RECOMMENDED BY wheels on the ground if you do not use NISSAN towing dollies Always release the NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed parking brake with the driving front wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated In case of emergency 6 11 VEHICLE RECOVERY fre
372. trip odometer Push the change button for more than 1 second to reset the trip odometer to zero Elapsed time driving distance and average speed information is also available Refer to Control panel buttons in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems section later in this manual RPMx1000 TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo lutions per minute rpm Do not rev the engine into the red zone 1 A CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone shift to a higher gear Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera ture The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions A CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera ture near the hot H end of the normal range reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature If the gauge is over the nor mal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible If the engine is over heated continued operation of the ve hicle may seriously damage the engine See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate action required FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level i
373. tronic parts A WARNING A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Some juris dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele phones while driving If you must make a call while your ve hicle is in motion the hands free cellu lar phone operational mode if so equipped is highly recommended Ex ercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so A CAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos sible from the electronic control modules Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in 20 cm away from the electronic con trol system harnesses Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body For details consult a NISSAN dealer BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM if so equipped A WARNING Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so A CAUTI
374. ts fit in all types of vehicles 1 32 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system BOOSTER SEATS PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS A WARNING e Infants and small children should al ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle Failure to use a child restraint or booster seat can result in serious injury or death Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle Also do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself NISSAN recommends that the booster seat be installed in the rear seat Ac cording to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat If you must install a booster seat in the front seat see Booster seat installa tion in this section A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap shoulder belt Failure to use a three point type seat belt with a booster seat can result in a serious in jury in sudden stop or collision Improper use or improper installation of a booster seat can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious injury or death in an accident e Do not use towels books pillows or other ite
375. uges P 2 3 24 Outside mirror controls P 3 26 2 Headlight fog light turn signal switch 5 Driver supplemental air bag horn P 1 37 25 Instrument brightness control P 2 25 P 2 21 R227 l Refer to the separate Navigation System Own 3 Steering wheel switch for audio control 6 Security indicator light P 2 16 er s Manual if so equipped and Bluetooth Hands Free Phone Sys ie Cruise control main set switches P 5 14 oo i tem if so equipped P 4 42 4 43 8 Windshield wiper washer switch P 2 19 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details O 6 Illustrated table of contents ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS Power steering fluid reservoir P 8 11 Engine oil filler cap P 8 8 Brake fluid reservoir P 8 12 Air cleaner P 8 16 Battery P 8 13 Fuse fusible link box P 8 21 Engine oil dipstick P 8 8 Radiator cap P 8 7 Drive belt location P 8 14 O Fuse block P 8 21 1 Windshield washer fluid reservoir P 8 12 12 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 7 NOTE Engine cover removed for clarity ease Eo Nan Be TI JA HER R Se eee eS eS K N See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details LOT I eZ Illustrated table of contents 0 7 WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning Name Page light Continuously Vari able Transmission CVT indicator light Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light Low windshield
376. umber 15 This number signed for passenger vehicles not all is the wheel or rim diameter in inches tires have this information 6 Two or three digit number 95 This 2 Three digit number 215 This num number is the tire s load index It is a ber gives the width in millimeters of measurement of how much weight the tire from sidewall edge to side each tire can support You may not wall edge find this information on all tires be 3 Two digit number 65 This number cause It is not required by law known as the aspect ratio gives the tire s ratio of height to width Maintenance and do it yourself 8 37 DOT XX XX XXX KXXX XX XX t t 2 3 DOT t 1 XXX XXX XXXX t t t 4 5 6 WDI0396 Example 2 TIN Tire Identification Number for a new tire example DOT XX XX XXX XXXX 1 DOT Abbreviation for the Depart ment Of Transportation The symbol can be placed above below or to the left or right of Tire Identification Num ber 2 Two digit code identification mark Manufacturer s 3 Two digit code Tire size 8 38 Maintenance and do it yourself 4 Three digit code Tire type code Optional 5 Three digit code Date of Manufac ture 6 Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For ex ample the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003 If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire 3 Tire ply composition and material The
377. umper Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out When towing a trailer transmission fluid should be changed more frequently For additional information see the Mainte nance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle such as a motor home A CAUTION Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage Whenever flat towing your vehicle al ways tow forward never backward e DO NOT tow any automatic transmis sion vehicle with all four wheels on the ground flat towing Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing recommended by NISSAN in the In case of emergency section of this manual Continuously Variable Transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle s drive wheels Always follow the dolly manufac turer s recommendations when using their prod uct Technical and consumer information 9 23 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT Department of Transportation Quality Grades All passenger car tires
378. ure DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM Canada only The daytime running lights automatically illumi nate when the engine is started with the parking brake released The daytime running lights oper ate with the headlight switch in the OFF DQE or AUTO position Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO or 2 position for headlight illumi nation when driving at night If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime running lights do not illumi Headlight switch position AUTO nate The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released The daytime run ning lights remain on until the ignition switch is turned off A WARNING When the daytime running light system is active other lights on your vehicle may not be on It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others pamen r pane Notadustabie Adjustable Not adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Available Available Available Available Available Available Available High beam lights Not available Available Not available Available Not available Available Available for headlights off Not available Not available Available Available Not available Not available Not available when ignition switch is OFF 45 second delay 2 24 Instruments and controls INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni tion sw
379. us riding positions are shown in the illustrations Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 39 1 40 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An in flating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child See Child restraints earlier in this section for details A WARNING Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental front air bags side air bags or curtain side impact air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained Pre teens and chil dren should be properly restrained in the rear seat if possible Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 41 A WARNING The seat belts the supplemental side air bags and curtain side impact air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor The side air bag and curtain side impact air bag in flate with great force Do not allow any one to place their hand leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seat back of the front seat or near the side roof rails Do not allow anyone sitting in Do not lean against the door the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door Some examples A WARNING of dangerous riding positions are show
380. use excessive force Drain plug tightening torque 22 29 ft lb 29 39 N m Maintenance and do it yourself 8 9 7 Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening then install the oil filler cap securely See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and con sumer information section of this manual for drain and refill capacity The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time Use these specifications for reference only Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine Start the engine Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter Correct as re quired Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level with the dipstick Add engine oil if necessary 8 10 Maintenance and do it yourself CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake 2 Turn the engine off 3 Place alarge drain pan under the oil filter Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the en gine Coat the gasket on the new filter with cl
381. use of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not come on check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the engine hood Maintenance and do it yourself 8 21 3 Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up 4 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment 5 If the fuse is open replace it with a new fuse 6 If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition check the fusible links If any of these fusible links are melted replace with only genuine NISSAN parts 8 22 Maintenance and do it yourself PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not operate check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Pull the fuse box cover to remove 3 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller E ely SNE Se k TN T ag ye zzi SI bl banal iJ Malans WDI0452 Type A
382. use one of the following three methods Lightly tap the brake pedal When the ve hicle attains the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Push and hold the COAST SET switch Re lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed Push and release the COAST SET switch Each time you do this the set speed de creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To resume the preset speed push and re lease the ACCEL RES switch The vehicle re turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH 40 km h BREAK IN SCHEDULE A CAUTION During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short ened engine life and reduced engine performance Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed either fast or slow and do not run the engine over 4 000 rpm Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear Avoid quick starts Avoid hard braking as much as possible Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Starting and driving 5 15 INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Accelerate slowly and smoothly Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position Drive at moderate speeds on the highway Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy Avoi
383. using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean soft cloth damp ened in mild soap solution then wipe clean witha dry soft cloth Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather Before using any fabric protector read the manu facturer s recommendations Some fabric pro tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens A CAUTION Never use benzine thinner or any simi lar material Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly Do not use saddle soap car waxes polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners as they may damage the leather s natural finish Never use fabric protectors unless rec ommended by the manufacturer Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers It may dam age the lens cover FLOOR MATS The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior No matter what mats are used be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they be come excessively worn Floor mat positionin
384. ust accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi ronment This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 8 inches 20 cm between the radiator and your body This Transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmit ter USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands free operation of the Bluetooth Phone System If the vehicle is in motion some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Initialization When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the amber light on the overhead console illumi nates and the system is ready to accept voice commands If the 4 4 button is pressed before the initialization completes the system will an nounce Hands free phone system not ready and will not react to voice commands Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing v
385. vehicle is un der slippery conditions Be sure to drive carefully See Slip indicator light and Trac tion control system TCS off indicator light in the Instruments and controls section of this manual f a malfunction occurs in the system the SLIP and indicator lights come on in the instrument panel As long as these lights are on the traction control function is canceled The vehicle will behave like a vehicle without the system A WARNING The traction control system is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery sur faces and always drive carefully If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not stan dard equipment or are extremely dete riorated the traction control system may not operate properly and the indicator light may come on Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab sorbers struts springs and bushings are not standard equipment or are ex tremely deteriorated the traction con trol system may not operate properly and the indicator light may come on When driving on extremely inclined sur faces such as higher banked corners the traction control system may not op erate properly and the indicator lig
386. vice information through technical bulletins service tips and in dealership training programs They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve hicles before they work on your vehicle rather than after they have worked on it You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economical way GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day to day operation of the vehicle general maintenance should be per formed regularly as prescribed in this section If you detect any unusual sounds vibrations or smells be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly In addition you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required When performing any checks or maintenance work closely observe the Maintenance precau tions later in this section EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with is found later in this section Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time unless otherwise specified Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly Also ensure that all latches lock securely Lubricate hinges latches latch pins rollers and links as necessary Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is release
387. warning light Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and in the In case of emergency section TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is turned ON The light will remain on after the 1 minute Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section A WARNING If the light does illuminate with the ig nition switch turned ON have the ve hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible 2 12 Instruments and controls If the light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may be flat If you have a flat tire re place it with a
388. witch the Intelligent Key Intelligent Key operation Push the button All doors lock The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked When the button is pushed with all doors locked the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re minder that the doors are already locked The horn may or may not beep Refer to Silencing the horn beep feature vehicles without navigation system in the Pre driving check and adjustments section or Vehicle electronic systems vehicles with navigation system in the Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone sys tems section later in this manual Confirm that the security indicator light comes on The security light stays on for about 30 seconds The vehicle security sys tem is now pre armed After about 30 sec onds the vehicle security system automati cally shifts into the armed phase The security light begins to flash once every 3 seconds If during the 30 second pre arm time period the driver s door is unlocked by the key a request switch or the Intelligent Key or if the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON the system will not arm If the key is turned slowly when locking the driver s door the system may not arm Furthermore if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock position to remove the key the system may be disarmed when the key is removed If
389. within the operating range it is possible for anyone even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock unlock the doors Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch The door will be unlocked but will not open Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door DOOR LOCKS UNLOCKS INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION PRECAUTION You can lock or unlock the doors without taking e Do not push the door handle request switch the key out of your pocket or bag with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as When you carry the Intelligent Key with you you illustrated The close distance to the door can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system handle request switch within the range of opera to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli on gent Key is outside the vehicle After locking with the door handle request switch verify the doors are securely locked by testing them To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle make sure you carry the key with you and then lock the doors Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 9 Locking doors 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion Remove the key if any key is in the ignition switch 2 Close all doors Push any door handle request switch 1 while carrying the Intelligent Key with you All doors and the trunk will lock
390. xample if you were directed to dial an ex tension by an automated system Say Send one two three four 4 50 Display screen heater air conditioner audio and phone systems The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers The system then ends the VR ses sion and returns to the call Transfer call Use the Transfer Call com mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired The system announces Transfer call Call transferred to privacy mode The system then ends the VR session You can also issue the Transfer Call com mand again to return to a hands free call through the vehicle Mute Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it Use the mute command again to unmute your voice NOTE If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on the Mute feature will be reset to off for the next call so the other party can hear your voice Phone book NOTE Phone book commands are not available when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Phone Book New Entry Edit Delete List Names The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each phone paired with the system Each name can have up to 4 locations phone numbers associ ated with it NOTE Each phone has its
391. y switch 1 and 2 1 Set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition ON Do not start the en gine Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at least 1 second to operate the automatic drive positioner Turn the outside mirror control switch to L left 5 Depress the brake pedal 6 Move the CVT selector lever to R Reverse 7 Adjust the mirror to the desired viewing po sition for backing up by operating the out side mirror control switch Push the SET switch and within 5 seconds push the memory switch 1 or 2 selected in step 3 fully for at least 1 second The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch After the indicator light goes off the se lected mirror position is stored in the se lected memory 1 or 2 Turn the outside mirror control switch to R right Repeat the above procedure to ad just the right mirror position and store in the selected memory When the drivers seat accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors are not in the memorized position the outside mirror will move with the initial tilt down angle Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 29 Confirming memory storage Turn the ignition ON and push the SET switch If the main memory has not been stored the indicator light will come on for approximately 0 5 seconds When the memory has stored the position the indica tor light wil

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Tektronix TDS 340A User's Manual  F 650 GS - BMW Motorrad España  GE Infrastructure Sensing  Samsung Galaxy TabPRO (10.1, 4G) Manual de Usuario  Manuel d`utilisation  Ross Video Limited  Agilent 2100 Bioanalyzer User's Guide for  Fanless Mini PC    F - enrdd.com  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file